Network Video Management System Standard Edition

Network Video Management System
Standard Edition 2016 R3
Administrator Manual
Network Video Management System Standard Edition 2016 R3 - Administrator Manual
Contents
Copyright, trademarks and disclaimer........................ 9
Before you start ....................................................... 10
About minimum system requirements ................................. 10
About naming of host names ............................................... 10
About important port numbers ............................................ 10
About daylight saving time .................................................. 11
About time servers .............................................................. 11
About virus scanning ........................................................... 12
System overview ...................................................... 13
Software and system components ....................................... 13
Clients ................................................................................. 14
Network Video Management System Smart Client .............................. 14
NVMS Mobile client ............................................................................. 15
Network Video Management System Web Client................................. 17
Recording Server Manager .................................................. 18
Network Video Management System Download Manager .... 19
Licenses............................................................................... 21
About licenses .................................................................................... 21
License information overview ............................................................. 22
About device changes without activation ........................................... 23
Hardware device summary ................................................................. 24
About replacing hardware devices ...................................................... 24
Get additional licenses ........................................................................ 25
Contents
2
Network Video Management System Standard Edition 2016 R3 - Administrator Manual
About license activation ..................................................................... 25
Install and upgrade .................................................. 27
Install your system software ............................................... 27
Install Network Video Management System Smart Client .... 27
Install video device drivers ................................................. 29
Upgrade ............................................................................... 30
About updates .................................................................................... 30
Upgrading from one product version to another product version........ 30
About removing system components ................................... 30
First time use ........................................................... 31
Configure the system in the Management Application ......... 31
Best practices ...................................................................... 33
About protecting recording databases from corruption ...................... 33
About saving changes to the configuration ......................................... 34
About using the help........................................................................... 34
About restarting services.................................................................... 35
Monitor storage space usage .............................................................. 35
View video from cameras in Management Application ........................ 35
Getting started ......................................................... 37
About the Getting started page ........................................... 37
Automatic configuration wizard........................................... 37
Automatic configuration wizard: First page ........................................ 37
Automatic configuration wizard: Scanning options ............................. 37
Automatic configuration wizard: Select hardware manufacturers to scan
for ...................................................................................................... 37
Automatic configuration wizard: Scanning for hardware devices ....... 38
Automatic configuration wizard: Continue after scan ......................... 38
Contents
3
Network Video Management System Standard Edition 2016 R3 - Administrator Manual
Add hardware wizard .......................................................... 38
Express ............................................................................................... 39
Manual ................................................................................................ 40
Configure storage wizard .................................................... 42
Configure storage: Video settings and preview .................................. 42
Configure storage: Online schedule .................................................... 43
Configure storage: Live and recording settings (motion JPEG cameras)44
Configure storage: Live and recording settings - H.264/MPEG4 cameras45
Configure storage: Drive selection ...................................................... 46
Configure storage: Recording and archiving settings.......................... 48
Adjust motion detection wizard ........................................... 49
Adjust motion detection: Exclude regions ........................................... 50
Adjust motion detection: Motion detection ......................................... 50
Manage user access wizard ................................................. 52
Manage user access: Basic and Windows users .................................. 52
Manage user access: Access summary ................................................ 53
Advanced configuration ........................................... 54
Hardware devices ................................................................ 54
About hardware devices ..................................................................... 54
About microphones ............................................................................. 54
About speakers ................................................................................... 54
About recording audio ........................................................................ 54
About dedicated input/output devices ................................................ 55
Show or hide microphones or speakers .............................................. 55
Configure hardware devices ............................................................... 55
Delete/disable hardware devices ....................................................... 56
About replacing hardware devices ...................................................... 56
About the Replace Hardware Device wizard ....................................... 57
Contents
4
Network Video Management System Standard Edition 2016 R3 - Administrator Manual
Speaker properties ............................................................................. 58
Hardware properties ........................................................................... 59
Cameras and storage information........................................ 61
About video and recording configuration ............................................ 61
About database resizing ..................................................................... 61
About motion detection ...................................................................... 62
About motion detection and PTZ cameras ........................................... 63
Configure camera-specific schedules .................................................. 63
Configure when cameras should do what ........................................... 65
Configure motion detection ................................................................ 66
Disable or delete cameras .................................................................. 66
Move PTZ type 1 and 3 to required positions ...................................... 66
Recording and storage properties ....................................................... 67
Camera properties .............................................................................. 81
MJPEG video format ............................................................................ 83
MPEG video format ............................................................................. 84
Microphones ........................................................................ 97
About microphones ............................................................................. 97
Configure microphones or speakers.................................................... 98
Show or hide microphones or speakers .............................................. 98
Microphone (properties) ..................................................................... 98
Events and output ............................................................... 99
About input and output ....................................................................... 99
About events and output .................................................................... 99
Overview of events and output ......................................................... 100
Add an analytics event...................................................................... 101
Add a hardware input event ............................................................. 102
Add a hardware output ..................................................................... 102
Add a manual event .......................................................................... 103
Contents
5
Network Video Management System Standard Edition 2016 R3 - Administrator Manual
Add a generic event .......................................................................... 103
Add a timer event ............................................................................. 104
Configure hardware output on event ................................................ 104
Configure general event handling ..................................................... 105
Generate alarms based on analytics events ...................................... 105
Test a generic event ......................................................................... 105
General event properties .................................................................. 107
Events and output properties ........................................................... 107
Scheduling and archiving .................................................. 116
About scheduling .............................................................................. 116
About archiving ................................................................................ 116
Configure general scheduling and archiving ..................................... 121
General scheduling properties .......................................................... 121
Camera-specific scheduling properties ............................................. 124
Logs................................................................................... 126
About logs ........................................................................................ 126
Configure system, event and audit logging ....................................... 128
Log properties .................................................................................. 128
Notifications ...................................................................... 130
About notifications ........................................................................... 130
Email ................................................................................................ 130
SMS .................................................................................................. 132
Scheduling ........................................................................................ 134
Server access .................................................................... 135
About server access .......................................................................... 135
About registered services ................................................................. 135
Configure server access .................................................................... 136
Server access properties .................................................................. 136
Master/Slave ..................................................................... 138
Contents
6
Network Video Management System Standard Edition 2016 R3 - Administrator Manual
About master and slave .................................................................... 138
Configure master and slave servers .................................................. 138
Master/slave properties ................................................................... 138
Users ................................................................................. 139
About users ...................................................................................... 139
Add basic users ................................................................................ 139
Add Windows users .......................................................................... 140
Add user groups ............................................................................... 140
Configure user and group rights ....................................................... 141
User properties ................................................................................. 141
Services ............................................................................. 145
About services .................................................................................. 145
About the tray icons ......................................................................... 146
Start and stop services ..................................................................... 147
Start, stop, or restart the Event Server service ................................. 147
Servers .............................................................................. 148
NVMS Mobile ..................................................................................... 148
Alarms ............................................................................... 165
About alarms .................................................................................... 165
About maps ...................................................................................... 167
Add an alarm .................................................................................... 167
Add a time profile (for alarms) ......................................................... 167
Alarms properties ............................................................................. 169
Options .................................................................. 173
About automatic device discovery ..................................... 173
Change default file paths ................................................... 173
Settings ............................................................................. 174
General ............................................................................................. 174
Contents
7
Network Video Management System Standard Edition 2016 R3 - Administrator Manual
User Interface .................................................................................. 174
Connecting Hardware Devices .......................................................... 175
Default File Paths ............................................................................. 176
Audio Recording ............................................................................... 177
Analytics Events (properties) ........................................................... 177
Event Server Settings ....................................................................... 178
System maintenance .............................................. 179
Backing up and restoring configuration ............................. 179
About backup and restore of configuration ....................................... 179
Back up system configuration ........................................................... 179
Restore system configuration ........................................................... 179
Back up and restore alarm and map configuration ........................... 180
Export and import Management Application configuration ............... 183
Restore system configuration from a restore point........................... 184
Importing changes to configuration .................................. 185
About importing changes to configuration ........................................ 185
About required fields for CSV files when you import changes to
configurations .................................................................................. 185
Import changes to configuration ...................................................... 186
Glossary of Terms .................................................. 187
Index ..................................................................... 195
Contents
8
Network Video Management System Standard Edition 2016 R3 - Administrator Manual
Copyright, trademarks and disclaimer
Copyright
2016 Sony Corporation.
Trademarks
Microsoft and Windows are registered trademarks of Microsoft Corporation. App Store is a service
mark of Apple Inc. Android is a trademark of Google Inc.
All other trademarks mentioned in this document are trademarks of their respective owners.
Disclaimer
This text is intended for general information purposes only, and due care has been taken in its
preparation.
Any risk arising from the use of this information rests with the recipient, and nothing herein should
be construed as constituting any kind of warranty.
Sony Corporation reserve the right to make adjustments without prior notification.
All names of people and organizations used in the examples in this text are fictitious. Any
resemblance to any actual organization or person, living or dead, is purely coincidental and
unintended.
This product may make use of third party software for which specific terms and conditions may
apply. When that is the case, you can find more information in the file
3rd_party_software_terms_and_conditions.txt located in your surveillance system
installation folder.
Copyright, trademarks and disclaimer
9
Network Video Management System Standard Edition 2016 R3 - Administrator Manual
Before you start
About minimum system requirements
For information about the minimum system requirements to the various components of your
system, go to the Sony website http://www.sony.net/CameraSystem/Product-info.
About naming of host names
Names of hosts you use in connection with your VMS system must follow the Microsoft standard of
naming. This means that all host names must only use the ASCII letters 'a' through 'z' (in a
case-insensitive manner), the digits '0' through '9', and the hyphen ('-'). If you use country- or
regionally-specific characters as part of a host name for a component you use with the VMS, you
may not be able to establish a connection between the system and the host machine.
You must have administrator rights on the computer that should run the surveillance system. If
you do not have administrator rights, you cannot configure the surveillance system.
About important port numbers
Your system uses specific ports when it communicates with computers, cameras and other devices.
To be sure that your system runs as smoothly as possible, make sure that the following ports are
open for data traffic on your network when you use your system:
Name
Description
Used for FTP traffic.
Port 20 and 21 (inbound
and outbound)
File Transfer Protocol (FTP) is a standard for exchanging files
across networks. FTP uses the TCP/IP standards for data transfer,
and is often used for uploading or downloading files to and from
servers.
Used for SMTP traffic.
Port 25 (inbound and
outbound)
Port 80 (inbound and
outbound)
Simple Mail Transfer Protocol (SMTP) is a standard for sending
e-mail messages between servers. This port should be open
because some cameras may send images to the surveillance
system server via e-mail.
Used for HTTP traffic between the surveillance server, cameras,
and Network Video Management System Smart Client.
It is the default communication port for the surveillance system's
Image Server service.
Port 554 (inbound and
outbound)
Used for RSTP traffic in connection with H.264 video streaming.
Port 1024 (outbound only)
Used for HTTP traffic between cameras and the surveillance
server.
Before you start
10
Network Video Management System Standard Edition 2016 R3 - Administrator Manual
Name
Description
Port 1234 (inbound and
outbound)
Used for event handling.
Port 8081 and 8082
Used for communication with the Mobile service.
Port 22331
Used for communication with the Event Server service.
You or your organization may also use other port numbers. An example could be that you have
changed the server access (on page 136) port from its default port number (80) to another port
number.
About daylight saving time
Daylight saving time (DST) is the practice of advancing clocks in order for evenings to have more
daylight and mornings to have less. The use of DST varies between countries/regions.
When you work with a surveillance system, which is inherently time-sensitive, it is important that
you know how the system handles DST.
Spring: Switch from Standard Time to DST
The change from standard time to DST is not much of an issue since you jump one hour forward.
Example:
The clock jumps forward from 02:00 standard time to 03:00 DST, and the day has 23 hours. In
that case, there is no data between 02:00 and 03:00 in the morning since that hour, for that day,
did not exist.
Fall: Switch from DST to Standard Time
When you switch from DST to standard time in the fall, you jump one hour back.
Example:
The clock jumps backward from 02:00 DST to 01:00 standard time, repeating that hour, and the
day has 25 hours. You reach 01:59:59, then immediately revert back to 01:00:00. If the system
did not react, it would essentially re-record that hour, so the first instance of 01:30 would be
overwritten by the second instance of 01:30.
To solve such an issue from happening, your system archives the current video in the event the
system time changes by more than five minutes. You cannot view the first instance of the 01:00
hour directly in any clients, but the data is recorded and safe. You can browse this video in
Network Video Management System Smart Client by opening the archived database directly.
About time servers
When your system receives images from cameras, these images are instantly time-stamped. Since
hardware devices are separate units which may have separate timing devices, the hardware device
time and your system time may not be fully synchronized. The result is that your system may stop
recording from the hardware devices all together if there is a discrepancy between hardware device
time and your system time.
Before you start
11
Network Video Management System Standard Edition 2016 R3 - Administrator Manual
To prevent this from happening, use a time server to auto-synchronize camera and system time.
This allows you to have consistent time-synchronization. Not all cameras support timestamps, so
make sure your camera supports this before you begin to use a time server.
You can use the recording server as a time server if you want to (see "Connecting Hardware
Devices" on page 175).
About virus scanning
As is the case with any other database software, if an antivirus program is installed on a computer
running Network Video Management System software, it is important that you exclude specific file
types and locations, as well as certain network traffic. Without implementing these exceptions,
virus scanning uses a considerable amount of system resources. On top of that, the scanning
process can temporarily lock files which likely results in a disruption in the recording process or
even database corruption.
When you need to perform virus scanning, do not scan Recording Server directories containing
recording databases. The recording server directories are set to c:\mediadatabase\ by default, as
well as all folders under that location.
Avoid also to perform virus scanning on archive storage directories. In older versions of the
software, the databases are by default located in the installation folder, each being a subfolder with
the MAC address of the device recorded.
Create the following additional exclusions:
•
File types: .blk, .idx, .pic, .pqz, .sts, .ts
•
C:\Program Files\Sony or C:\Program Files (x86)\Sony and all subdirectories.
•
Exclude network scanning on TCP ports:
Product
TCP ports
Network Video Management
System Standard Edition
80, 25, 21, 1234, 1237, 22331
products
NVMS Mobile
8081
or
•
Exclude network scanning of the following processes:
Product
Processes
RecordingServer.exe, ImageServer.exe,
Network Video Management
ManagementApplication.exe, ImageImportService.exe,
System Standard Edition
RecordingServerManager.exe,
products
VideoOS.ServiceControl.Service.exe, VideoOS.Event.Server.exe
NVMS Mobile
VideoOS.MobileServer.Service.exe
Organizations may have strict guidelines regarding virus scanning, however it is important that the
above locations and files are excluded from virus scanning.
Before you start
12
Network Video Management System Standard Edition 2016 R3 - Administrator Manual
System overview
Software and system components
Your system consists of a number of components, each targeted at specific tasks and user types.
Software components
The Management Application is the main application in which you
add cameras, set up users and configure your system.
Management Application
You do not use the Management Application to view live, playback
or archived video. Instead, you use one of the viewing clients.
Network Video Management System Smart Client is a client for
the daily operations of security installations. Its streamlined
interface makes it easy to monitor installations of all sizes,
manage security incidents and access and export live and
recorded video.
Network Video Management
You must install Network Video Management System Smart Client
System Smart Client
on any computer that should be able to connect to your system
and view video.
Sony recommends that you always use the latest version of
Network Video Management System Smart Client to best use new
features and functions included in your surveillance system.
A free application designed by Sony that allows you to view video
from your system from almost anywhere on your smartphone or
tablet.
NVMS Mobile
You must install NVMS Mobile on all devices that should be able
to connect to your system and view video.
You can also control outputs, such as opening and closing doors
and switching lights on or off, allowing you to gain control and
dynamically respond to incidents in the system.
A simplified web-based client application for Network Video
Management System surveillance systems for viewing, playing
back and sharing video from most operating systems and web
Network Video Management browsers.
System Web Client
You do not need to install any software to access Network Video
Management System Web Client. To access your system through
Network Video Management System Web Client, you must know
the address of the surveillance system's server.
System overview
13
Network Video Management System Standard Edition 2016 R3 - Administrator Manual
System components
Recording Server service
The Recording Server service runs to ensure that devices transfer
video streams to your system. The Recording Server service is
installed automatically and runs in the background on the
surveillance system server.
You manage the service through the Management Application.
Handles configuration of alarms and maps from all servers within
the surveillance system installations, including Master/slave
setups, throughout your organization.
Event Server service
The Event Server service enables monitoring and instant
overview of alarms and possible technical problems within your
systems.
The event server is automatically installed on the surveillance
system server and runs in the background.
Microsoft® SQL Server
Express Database
The surveillance system's alarm data is stored in a SQL Server
Express database.
The SQL database is a lightweight, yet powerful, version of a full
SQL server which is automatically installed on, and runs in the
background of, your surveillance system server.
Handles access to the surveillance system for users logging in
with clients.
Image Server service
Download Manager
The Image Server service is automatically installed and runs in
the background on the surveillance system server. You can
manage the service through the Management Application.
Manages the system-related features your organization's users
can access from a targeted welcome page on the surveillance
system server.
Clients
Clients are applications used for viewing live and recorded video from the hardware devices set up
in the Management Application. Your system supports three different clients:
•
Network Video Management System Smart Client
•
NVMS Mobile client
•
Network Video Management System Web Client
Network Video Management System Smart Client
About Network Video Management System Smart Client
Designed for Sony Network Video Management System IP video management software, the
Network Video Management System Smart Client is an easy-to-use client application that provides
intuitive control over security installations. Manage security installations with Network Video
Management System Smart Client which gives users access to live and recorded video, instant
System overview
14
Network Video Management System Standard Edition 2016 R3 - Administrator Manual
control of cameras and connected security devices, and an overview of recordings. Available in
multiple local languages, Network Video Management System Smart Client has an adaptable user
interface that can be optimized for individual operators’ tasks and adjusted according to specific
skills and authority levels.
The interface allows you to tailor your viewing experience to specific working environments by
selecting a light or dark theme, depending on room lighting or brightness of the video. It also
features work-optimized tabs and an integrated video timeline for easy surveillance operation.
Network Video Management System Smart Client must be installed on users' computers.
Surveillance system administrators manage clients' access to the surveillance system through the
Management Application. Recordings viewed by clients are provided by your Network Video
Management System's Image Server service. The service runs in the background on the
surveillance system server. Separate hardware is not required.
To download Network Video Management System Smart Client, you must connect to the
surveillance system server which presents you with a welcome page that lists available clients and
language versions. System administrators can use Network Video Management System Download
Manager to control what clients and language versions should be available to users on the welcome
page of the Network Video Management System Download Manager.
NVMS Mobile client
About NVMS Mobile client
NVMS Mobile client is a mobile surveillance solution closely integrated with the rest of your Network
Video Management System. It runs on your Android tablet or smartphone, your Apple® tablet,
smartphone or portable music player and gives you access to cameras, views and other
functionality set up in the management clients.
System overview
15
Network Video Management System Standard Edition 2016 R3 - Administrator Manual
Use the NVMS Mobile client to view and play back live and recorded video from one or multiple
cameras, control pan-tilt-zoom (PTZ) cameras, trigger output and events and use the Video push
functionality to send video from your device to your Network Video Management System.
If you want to use NVMS Mobile client with your system, you must add a Mobile server to establish
the connection between the NVMS Mobile client and your system. Once the Mobile server is set up,
download the NVMS Mobile client for free from Google Play or App Store to start using NVMS
Mobile.
You need one hardware device license per device that should be able to push video to your
Network Video Management System.
System overview
16
Network Video Management System Standard Edition 2016 R3 - Administrator Manual
Network Video Management System Web Client
About Network Video Management System Web Client
Network Video Management System Web Client is a web-based client application for viewing,
playing back and sharing video. It provides instant access to the most commonly used surveillance
functions, such as viewing live video, play back recorded video, print and export evidence. Access
to features depends on individual user rights which are set up in the management client.
To enable access to the Network Video Management System Web Client, you must install a Mobile
server to establish the connection between the Network Video Management System Web Client and
your system. The Network Video Management System Web Client itself does not require any
installation itself and works with most Internet browsers. Once you have set up the Mobile server,
you can monitor your Network Video Management System anywhere from any computer or tablet
with Internet access (provided you know the right external/Internet address, user name and
password).
Access Network Video Management System Web Client
If you have a NVMS Mobile server installed on your computer, you can use the Network Video
Management System Web Client to access your cameras and views. Because you do not need to
install Network Video Management System Web Client, you can access it from the computer where
you installed the NVMS Mobile server, or any other computer you want to use for this purpose.
1. Set up the NVMS Mobile server in the Management Application.
2. If you are using the computer where NVMS Mobile server is installed, you can right-click
the NVMS Mobile Server icon in the system tray, and select Open Network Video
Management System Web Client.
3. If you are not using the computer where NVMS Mobile server is installed, you can access it
from a browser. Continue with step 4 in this process.
4. Open an Internet browser (Internet Explorer, Mozilla Firefox, Google Chrome or Safari).
5. Type the external IP address, that is, the external address and port of the server on which
the NVMS Mobile server is running.
System overview
17
Network Video Management System Standard Edition 2016 R3 - Administrator Manual
Example: The NVMS Mobile server is installed on a server with the IP address 127.2.3.4 and
is configured to accept HTTP connections on port 8081 and HTTPS connections on port 8082
(default settings of the installer).
In the address bar of your browser, type: http://1.2.3.4:8081 or https://1.2.3.4:8082,
depending on whether you want to use a standard HTTP connection or a secure HTTPS
connection. You can now begin using Network Video Management System Web Client.
6. Add the address as a bookmark in your browser for easy future access to Network Video
Management System Web Client. If you use Network Video Management System Web
Client on the local computer on which you installed the NVMS Mobile server, you can also
use the desktop shortcut which the installer creates. Click the shortcut to launch your
default browser and open Network Video Management System Web Client.
You must clear the cache of Internet browsers running the Network Video Management System
Web Client before you can use a new version of the Network Video Management System Web
Client. System administrators must ask their Network Video Management System Web Client users
to clear their browser cache after upgrading, or force this action remotely (you can do this action
only in Internet Explorer in a domain).
Recording Server Manager
The Recording Server service is a vital part of the surveillance system. Video streams are only
transferred to your system while the Recording Server service is running. The Recording Server
Manager informs you about the state of the Recording Server service. It also lets you manage the
service.
In the notification area (the system tray), the Recording Server Manager's icon indicates whether
the Recording Server service is running or not.
- A green icon in the notification area indicates that the Recording Server service is running.
- A red icon in the notification area indicates that the Recording Server service has stopped.
By right-clicking the icon, you can open the Management Application, start and stop the Recording
Server service, view log files, and view version information.
Monitor System Status
Right-click the notification area's Recording Server icon and select Show System Status to get
access to the Status window.
The Status window lets you view the status of the image server(s) and connected cameras. The
status of each server/camera is indicated by a color:
•
Green indicates that the server or camera is running correctly.
•
Gray indicates that the camera (not the server) is not running. Typically, a camera is
indicated in gray in the following situations:
•
•
The camera is not online (as defined in the camera's online period schedule).
•
The Recording Server service has been stopped.
Red indicates that the server or camera is not running. This may because it has been
unplugged or due to a network or hardware error. Errors are listed in the Recording Server
log file.
System overview
18
Network Video Management System Standard Edition 2016 R3 - Administrator Manual
Place your mouse pointer over a camera in the status window to view details about the relevant
camera. The information appears as a pop-up and updates about every 10 seconds.
Resolution
The resolution of the camera.
FPS
The number of frames per second (frame rate) currently used by
the camera. The number updates each time the camera has
received 50 frames.
Frame count
The number of frames received from the camera since the
Recording Server service was last started.
Received KB
The number of kilobytes sent the by camera since the Recording
Server service was last started.
Offline
Indicates the number of times the camera has been offline due to
an error.
Network Video Management System Download
Manager
The Network Video Management System Download Manager allows you to manage the
system-related features your organizations can access. You can reach Network Video Management
System Download Manager from a targeted welcome page on the surveillance system server.
•
To access Network Video Management System Download Manager from Windows' Start
menu: Select All Programs > Sony Network Video Management System Download
Manager > Download Manager.
Examples of user-accessible features
•
Network Video Management System Smart Client. Users connect to the surveillance
server through an Internet browser where they are presented with a welcome page. From
the welcome page, users can download Network Video Management System Smart Client
software and install it on their computers.
•
Various plug-ins. Downloading such plug-ins can be relevant for users if your
organization uses add-on products with the surveillance system.
The welcome page
The welcome page links to downloads of various features. Users can select language from a menu
in the top right corner of the welcome page.
To view the welcome page, open an Internet browser (for example, Internet Explorer version 6.0
or later) and connect to the following address:
http://[surveillance server IP address or hostname]
If you have configured the Image Server service with a port number other than the default port 80
(you configure this as part of the server access properties), users must specify the port number as
well, separated from the IP address or hostname by a colon:
http://[surveillance server IP address or hostname]:[port number]
The content of the welcome page is managed through Network Video Management System
Download Manager and can look different in different organizations.
System overview
19
Network Video Management System Standard Edition 2016 R3 - Administrator Manual
Immediately after you install your system, the welcome page provides access to Network Video
Management System Smart Client in all languages. You can also download Network Video
Management System Smart Client in 32-bit or 64-bit if you run a 64-bit operating system and in
32-bit if you run a 32-bit operating system. This initial look of the welcome page is automatically
provided through Network Video Management System Download Manager's default configuration.
Default configuration of Network Video Management System Download
Manager
Network Video Management System Download Manager has a default configuration. This ensures
that your organization's users can access standard features without the surveillance system
administrator having to set up anything. The Network Video Management System Download
Manager configuration is represented in a tree structure.
Download Manager's tree structure explained:
•
The first level of the tree structure indicates that you are working with a system.
•
The second level indicates that this is the default setup.
•
The third level refers to the languages in which the welcome page is available. In the
example, the welcome page is available in a dozen languages (English, Arabic, Danish,
Dutch, French, and more).
•
The fourth level refers to the features that you can make available to users. For example,
you could limit these features to Network Video Management System Smart Client.
•
The fifth level ( 5 ) refers to particular versions of each feature, for example, version 4.0,
32-bit, and more that you can make available to users.
•
The sixth level ( 6 ) refers to the language versions of the features which can be made
available to users. For Network Video Management System Smart Client, which is only
available with all languages embedded, the only option is All Languages.
The fact that only standard features are initially available helps reduce installation time and save
space on the server. There is no need to have a feature or language version available on the server
if nobody is going to use it. You can make more features and/or languages available if you need to.
Making new features available
When you install new features, these are by default selected in Network Video Management System
Download Manager and immediately available to users through the welcome page.
You can always show or hide features on the welcome page by selecting or clearing check boxes in
the tree structure. You can change the sequence in which features and languages are displayed on
the welcome page by dragging items and dropping them in the relevant position.
Hiding and removing features
You can remove features in several ways:
You can hide features from the welcome page by clearing check boxes in Network Video
Management System Download Manager's tree structure. If you do this, the features are still
installed on the surveillance system server, and by selecting check boxes in the tree structure, you
can quickly make the features available again.
You can remove features which have previously been made available through Network Video
Management System Download Manager. This removes the installation of the features on the
surveillance system server. The features disappear from Network Video Management System
Download Manager, but installation files for the features are kept in the surveillance system
System overview
20
Network Video Management System Standard Edition 2016 R3 - Administrator Manual
server's Installers or relevant language folder, so you can re-install them later if required. To do
so:
1. In Network Video Management System Download Manager, click Remove features...
2. In the Remove Features window, select the features you want to remove.
3. Click OK and then click Yes.
Licenses
About licenses
Once the installation is complete and you have activated your licenses, you can see an overview of
your licenses (see "License information overview" on page 22) for the current installation on the
Getting started page.
You have purchased at least two types of licenses:
Base licenses: As a minimum, you have a base license for one of the Network Video Management
System products. You may also have one or more base licenses for Network Video Management
System add-on products.
Hardware device licenses: Every hardware device that you add to your Network Video
Management System requires a hardware device license. You do not need hardware device licenses
for speakers, microphones or input and output devices attached to your cameras. You need only
one hardware device license per video encoder IP address even if you connect several cameras to
the video encoder. A video encoder can have one or more IP addresses.
For more information, see the list of supported hardware on the Sony website
http://www.sony.net/CameraSystem/NVMS/Technical-documents. If you want to use the video
push feature in NVMS Mobile, you also need one hardware device license per mobile device or
tablet that should be able to push video to your system. If you are short of hardware device
licenses, you can disable (see "Disable or delete cameras" on page 66) less important hardware
devices to allow new hardware devices to run instead. You may also need a hardware device
license for some devices that are NOT attached to your cameras. Examples of camera independent
devices are perimeter detectors and some types of audio devices and input/output boxes. See the
supported hardware site http://www.sony.net/CameraSystem/NVMS/Technical-documents on the
Sony website.
System overview
21
Network Video Management System Standard Edition 2016 R3 - Administrator Manual
License information overview
On the Getting started page under License in the bottom left corner, see the following
information about your hardware device licenses:
•
The number of hardware device licenses activated on this server and the total number of
hardware device licenses you have purchased as part of the same software license file.
•
If the same software license file is shared on multiple surveillance systems in a
master/slave setup, the license overview shows the same total number of purchased
licenses for all systems.
•
To find out how many free licenses you have, add the number of activated licenses on all
your systems and subtract this number from the total number of purchased licenses.
•
The maximum number of hardware devices you can add to each server in your VMS system.
To exceed this maximum, you must upgrade to a more advanced Network Video
Management System VMS product. For more information about how to do this, contact
your reseller.
•
The number of activated hardware devices you have replaced or added without having to
activate.
The column Changes without activation shows the number of hardware devices you can
replace or add without having to activate your hardware device licenses as well as how
many changes you have already made since last activation. Hardware devices added within
your number of device changes without activation run as fully activated hardware device
licenses and have the status Licensed in the Hardware device summary (on page 24)
table.
•
The number of hardware devices running in a 30-day grace period. If you have already
used your number of device changes without activating this or have added more hardware
devices than you have purchased licenses for, the added hardware devices run in a grace
period. Once the grace period expires, cameras are disabled and stops sending video to the
system. You can also see when the first grace period for a hardware device expires.
System overview
22
Network Video Management System Standard Edition 2016 R3 - Administrator Manual
If your system is not connected to the Internet, and you have added or replaced hardware devices
within your number of device changes without activating them or have added hardware devices
that now run in a grace period, click the Activate link to activate your hardware device licenses.
Your number of device changes without activation now reflects the new number of activated
licenses. The hardware devices previously in grace period are moved to activated if you have
enough purchased licenses. For more information, see About license activation (on page 25).
About device changes without activation
How the number of device changes without activation is
calculated
The device changes without activation are calculated based on three variables. If you have several
installations of the Sony software, the variables apply to each of them separately. The variables
are:
•
C% that is a fixed percentage of the total amount of activated licenses.
•
Cmin that is a fixed minimum value of the number of device changes without
activation.
•
Cmax that is a fixed maximum value of the number of devices changes without
activation.
The number of device changes without activation can never be lower than the Cmin value or
higher than the Cmax value. The calculated value based on the C% variable changes according to
how many activated devices you have on each installation in your system. Devices added with
device changes without activation are not counted as activated by the C% variable.
Sony defines the values of all three variables and the values are subject to change without
notification. The values of the variables differ depending on the product.
Examples based on C% = 15%, Cmin = 10 and Cmax =100
A customer buys 100 hardware device licenses. He adds 100 cameras to his system. He activates
his licenses and he now has 15 device changes without activation.
System overview
23
Network Video Management System Standard Edition 2016 R3 - Administrator Manual
A customer buys 100 hardware device licenses. He adds 100 cameras to his system and activates
his licenses. His device changes without activation is now 15. The customer decides to delete a
hardware device from his system. He has now 99 activated devices and his number of device
changes without activation drops to 14.
A customer buys 1000 hardware device licenses. He adds 1000 cameras and activates his licenses.
His device changes without activation is now 100. According to the C% variable, he should now
have had 150 devices changes without activation, but the Cmax variable only allows him to have
100 devices changes without activation.
A customer buys 10 hardware device licenses. He adds 10 cameras to his system and activates his
licenses. His number of device changes without activation is now 10 because of the Cmin variable.
If the number was only calculated based on the C% variable, he would only have had 1 (15% of
10 = 1.5 rounded off to 1).
A customer buys 115 hardware device licenses. He adds 100 cameras to his system and activates
his licenses. His device changes without activation is now 15. He adds another 15 cameras without
activating them, using 15 out of 15 of his device changes without activation. He removes 50 of the
cameras from the system and his device changes without activation goes down to 7. This means
that 8 of the cameras previously added within the 15 device changes without activation go into a
grace period. The customer now adds 50 new cameras. Because the customer activated 100
cameras on his system last time he activated his licenses, the device changes without activation
goes back to 15 and the 8 cameras, which were moved into a grace period, moves back as device
changes without activation. The 50 new cameras go into a grace period.
Hardware device summary
You can get an overview of the status of your hardware device licenses and channels by expanding
Advanced Configuration > Hardware Devices. The Hardware Device Summary table
contains the following information.
Hardware Device Name
The name of your hardware device
License
The licensing status of your hardware devices. You can see the
following statuses: Licensed, [number of] day(s) grace
period, Trial, or Expired.
Video channels
The number of available video channels on your hardware
devices.
Speaker Channels
The number of available speaker channels on your hardware
devices.
Microphone Channels
The number of available microphone channels on your hardware
devices.
Address
The HTTP addresses of your hardware devices.
WWW
Links to your hardware devices' web addresses.
Port
The ports your hardware devices use.
Device Driver
The name of the device drivers associated with your hardware
devices.
About replacing hardware devices
If you remove a hardware device from a recording server and save the configuration, you also free
a hardware device license. Simply disabling a device does not free a license. You can replace a
System overview
24
Network Video Management System Standard Edition 2016 R3 - Administrator Manual
licensed hardware device with a new hardware device and activate and license it instead. The total
number of purchased hardware device licenses corresponds to the total number of hardware
devices that can run on the surveillance system simultaneously.
When you replace a hardware device, you must use the Replace Hardware Device wizard (see
"About the Replace Hardware Device wizard" on page 57) to map all relevant databases of cameras,
microphones, inputs, outputs, and more. Remember to activate the license when you are finished.
Get additional licenses
If you want to add more hardware devices or other components that require a license that you
currently do not have licenses for, you must buy additional licenses to enable the devices to send
data to your system before the grace period ends.
•
To get additional licenses for your system, contact your Network Video Management
System product reseller.
New licenses to your existing surveillance system version:
•
Activate your licenses manually to get access to the new licenses.
For more information, see Activate licenses offline (on page 25).
New licenses and an upgraded surveillance system version:
•
You receive an updated software license file (.lic) with the new licenses and the
new version. You must use the new software license file during the installation of
the new version.
About license activation
When you have installed your VMS and added hardware devices, the hardware devices run in a
30-day grace period. Before the end of the 30-day grace period, you must activate your hardware
device licenses or your hardware devices stop sending video to your surveillance system.
Sony recommends that you activate your licenses before you make final adjustments to your
system and its hardware devices. For more information, see Activate licenses offline (on page 25).
If you add more hardware devices than the number of purchased hardware device licenses, the
hardware devices run with in a grace period. If you want to see video from these hardware devices
after the expiry of the grace period, you must buy additional licenses (see "Get additional licenses"
on page 25). You can also disable (see "Delete/disable hardware devices" on page 56) less
important cameras to allow new hardware devices to run instead.
If you have several VMS products installed in a master/slave setup, you activate your licenses from
each installation and get an updated and activated .lic file for each installation. This is also the case
if all your VMS products share the same software license file.
Activate licenses offline
You must manually activate your licenses if:
•
You have purchased additional licenses, want to upgrade
•
Sony has granted you a higher number of device changes without activation (see "About
device changes without activation" on page 23)
System overview
25
Network Video Management System Standard Edition 2016 R3 - Administrator Manual
1. From the File menu, select Activate License Offline.
2. Click Export to export a license request file.
3. The license request file is automatically given the same name as your SLC. If you have
several sites, remember to make the name unique so you easily can identify which file
belong to which site.
4. Copy the license request file to a computer with Internet access and log into our website.
For more details, see the license guide on our website
http://www.sony.net/CameraSystem/NVMS/Manuals.
5. Copy the activated software license file (.lic) that has the same name as your license
request file to your computer with Management Application.
6. In the same dialog box that you opened in step 1, click Browse to use the activated
software license file.
7. Click Activate.
If the computer that runs the Management Application does not have Internet access, you can
activate licenses offline.
System overview
26
Network Video Management System Standard Edition 2016 R3 - Administrator Manual
Install and upgrade
Install your system software
Do not install your surveillance software on a mounted drive. A mounted drive is a drive that is
attached to an empty folder on an NTFS (NT File System) volume, with a label or name instead of a
drive letter. If you use mounted drives, critical system features may not work as intended. You do
not, for example, receive any warnings if the system runs out of disk space.
Before you start: shut down any existing surveillance software.
1. Run the installation file
2. If you have a previous installation of your system or any of the other Network Video
Management System Standard Edition products installed, the system detects this
installation and informs you that your previous installation is removed after installing the
new version. If you accept this, click Yes to continue the installation. All your recordings
and configuration from the previous version are available in the new version
3. Select language for the installer and then click Continue
4. Select Trial to install a 30-day trial version of the system software if you do not have a
software license file named after your SLC. If you have a software license file, first save it
on your local drive. Do not try to import it directly from a network drive or a USB stick.
Import it by typing the destination of the software license file or clicking Browse
5. Read and accept the license agreement.
6. Select Typical or Custom installation. If you select Custom installation, you can select
application language, which features to install and where to install them. Let the installation
wizard complete.
You can now begin to configure your system (see "Configure the system in the Management
Application" on page 31).
Install Network Video Management System
Smart Client
You must install Network Video Management System Smart Client on your computer before you
can use it. Download Network Video Management System Smart Client from the surveillance
system server and install it on your computer or install it directly from a DVD.
Before you begin, visit the Sony website and verify that your computer meets the Network Video
Management System Smart Client's minimum system requirements
http://www.sony.net/CameraSystem/Product-info.
Install Network Video Management System Smart Client from the
management server
1. Open Internet Explorer and connect to the management server using the URL or IP address
of that server.
Install and upgrade
27
Network Video Management System Standard Edition 2016 R3 - Administrator Manual
2. On the Welcome page, click Language and select the language you want to use.
3. The Network Video Management System Smart Client setup wizard starts. In the
wizard, follow the installation instructions.
The wizard suggests an installation path. Normally, you can use the suggested installation path.
However, if you have previously used add-on products, this path might not be valid anymore.
Install Network Video Management System Smart Client silently
A surveillance system administrator can deploy the system or Network Video Management System
Smart Client to users’ computers by using tools such as Microsoft Systems Management Server
(SMS). With this tool, you can build up databases of hardware and software on local networks. You
can then use the databases for distributing and installing software applications over local networks.
To install silently:
1. Locate the Network Video Management System Smart Client .exe file Sony – Network
VMS Smart Client 2016 R3 Installer x64.exe. Find the file in a subfolder under the
folder httpdocs. The httpdocs folder is located under the folder in which your Sony
surveillance software is installed.
The path is typically (if you are using an English language version of the Network Video
Management System Smart Client):
C:\Program Files (x86)\Sony\Sony Surveillance\httpdocs\- Network VMS Smart
Client Installer\[version number] [bit-version]\All Languages\en-US
For example:
C:\Program Files (x86)\Sony\Sony Surveillance\httpdocs\- Network VMS Smart
Client Installer\2016 (64-bit)\All Languages\en-US
2. Run a silent installation using one of the following two options:
a) Run with default parameter settings:
To run a silent installation using the default values for all parameters, start a command
prompt (cmd.exe) in the directory where the installation program is located and perform
the following command:
•
Network Video Management System Smart Client:
Sony – Network VMS Smart Client 2016 R3 Installer x64.exe --quiet
Your system:
Sony - Network VMS Standard Edition Products 2016 R3 System Installer.exe --quiet
This performs a quiet installation of Network Video Management System Smart Client or
your system using default values for parameters such as target directory and so on. To
change the default settings, see the following:
b) Customize default parameters using an XML argument file as input:
In order to customize the default installation settings, you must provide an XML file with
modified values as input. In order to generate the XML file with default values, open a
command prompt in the directory where the installation program is located and perform the
following command:
Install and upgrade
28
Network Video Management System Standard Edition 2016 R3 - Administrator Manual
Network Video Management System Smart Client:
Sony – Network VMS Smart Client 2016 R3 Installer x64.exe --generateargsfile=[path]
•
Your system:
Sony - Network VMS Standard Edition Products 2016 R3 System Installer.exe --generateargsfile=[path]
Open the generated arguments.xml file in a text editor and perform any changes needed.
Then perform the following command in the same directory to run a modified version of the
silent installation.
•
Network Video Management System Smart Client:
Sony – Network VMS Smart Client 2016 R3 Installer x64.exe --arguments=[full path]args.xml --quiet
•
Your system:
Sony - Network VMS Standard Edition Products 2016 R3 System Installer.exe --arguments= [full
path]args.xml --quiet
Install video device drivers
Video device drivers are installed automatically during the initial installation of your system. New
versions of video device drivers, known as Network Video Management System Device Pack, are
released from time to time and made available for free on the Sony website
http://www.sony.net/CameraSystem. Sony recommends that you always use the latest version of
video device drivers. When you update video device drivers, you can install the latest version on
top of any version you may have installed.
When you install new video device drivers, your system cannot communicate with camera devices
from the moment you begin the installation until the moment installation is complete and you have
restarted the Recording Server service. Usually, the process takes no longer than a few minutes,
but Sony highly recommends that you perform the update at a time when you do not expect
important incidents to take place.
To install video device drives:
1. On the system server on which you want to install the new video device drivers version,
shut down any running surveillance software, including any running Recording Server
service.
2. Run the Network Video Management System Device Pack installation file and follow the
wizard.
3. When the wizard is complete, restart the Recording Server service.
If you use the Add Hardware Devices Wizard's Import from CSV File option, you must—if cameras
and server are offline—specify a HardwareDriverID for each hardware device you want to add.
To view a current list of IDs, view the release notes for the Network Video Management System
Device Pack used in your organization. Alternatively, visit the Sony website
http://www.sony.net/CameraSystem for the latest information.
Install and upgrade
29
Network Video Management System Standard Edition 2016 R3 - Administrator Manual
Upgrade
About updates
Sony releases service updates that offers improved functionality and support for new devices.
When a new version of your VMS software is available, a message in the yellow notification bar
informs you that you can update the software.
Sony recommends that you always install the latest version of your surveillance software to ensure
that your software is running as smoothly as possible.
Upgrading from one product version to another product
version
You can upgrade your entire system configuration from one product version to another, for
example from Network Video Management System Standard Edition 2013 to Network Video
Management System Standard Edition 2014 fairly fast and easily. Install the new product on top of
the old version without any need to remove the previous version.
When you install the new version of your system, it inherits the configuration from the previously
installed version/product. Sony recommends that you make regular backups of your server
configuration as a disaster recovery measure. You should also do this when you upgrade your
server. While it is rare that you lose your configuration (cameras, schedules, views and more), it
can happen under unfortunate circumstances. Fortunately, it takes only a minute to back up your
configuration.
Note that you do not need to manually remove the old version of your system before you install
the new version. The old version is removed when you install the new version.
About removing system components
To remove the entire surveillance system, including the surveillance server software and related
installation files, the video device drivers, Network Video Management System Download Manager,
Network Video Management System Smart Client, the Event Server service and the NVMS Mobile
server, from your server, follow the standard Windows procedure for uninstalling programs. See
the Windows Help for more information.
You can also remove individual components, such as Network Video Management System Smart
Client and video drivers by using the standard Windows procedure for uninstalling programs.
Important: If you remove your surveillance system, your recordings are not removed. They
remain on the server even after the server software has been removed. Configuration files also
remain on the server. This allows you to reuse your configuration if you install the system again at
a later time.
Install and upgrade
30
Network Video Management System Standard Edition 2016 R3 - Administrator Manual
First time use
Configure the system in the Management
Application
This following checklist outlines the tasks typically involved when you set up a system.
Although the following information is presented as a checklist, a completed checklist does not in
itself guarantee that the system matches your exact needs. To make the system match the needs
of your organization, Sony recommends that you monitor and adjust the system once it is running.
It is often a good idea to spend time on testing and adjusting the motion detection sensitivity
settings for individual cameras under different physical conditions including day or night, windy or
calm weather. Carry out such tests once the system is running. The set up of events and
associated actions also depends on your organization's needs.
You can print and use this checklist as you go along.
Install your system
See Install your system software (on page 27).
If you are upgrading an existing version of your system, see Upgrading from one product
version to another product version (on page 30).
Activate your software license file
You may not need to go through this step as your vendor often takes care of the process
for you.
To activate you software license file, see About license activation (on page 25).
Open the Management Application
Open the Management Application after installation. This is where you configure and
maintain your system and features.
Add hardware devices to your system
When you open your system for the first time, the Advanced configuration wizard help
assists you to add hardware devices (cameras, encoders and dedicated I/O boxes) to
your system and configure them with user names and passwords. See Automatic
configuration wizard (on page 37).
Activate your hardware device licenses
You may not need to go through this step as your vendor often takes care of the process
for you. If your surveillance system is online, you can also skip this step.
You have now added your hardware devices, it is time to activate your hardware devices
licenses (see "About license activation" on page 25).
Configure cameras
You can specify a wide variety of settings for each camera connected to your system.
Settings include video format, resolution, motion detection sensitivity, where to store and
archive recordings, any pan-tilt-zoom (PTZ) preset positions, association with
microphones, speakers and more. See About video and recording configuration (on page
61).
First time use
31
Network Video Management System Standard Edition 2016 R3 - Administrator Manual
Configure events, input and output
Use system events, for example based on input from sensors, to automatically trigger
actions in your system.
Examples of actions: starting or stopping recording on cameras, switching to a particular
video frame rate, making PTZ cameras move to specific preset positions. Also use events
to activate hardware output, such as lights or sirens. See Overview of events (see
"Overview of events and output" on page 100).
Configure scheduling
Set up when do you want to archive and if you want cameras to transfer video to your
system at all times, and other cameras to transfer video only within specific periods of
time as well as when specific events occur. Also specify when you want to receive
notifications from the system. See Configure general scheduling and archiving (on page
121) and Configure camera-specific schedules (on page 63).
Configure clients' access to your system
A number of different client applications are included with your system. Specify whether
you want clients to access the system server from the Internet, how many clients you
want to be able to connect simultaneously and more. See Configure server access (on
page 135).
Configure master/slave servers
You only need to follow this step if you want to run several servers together. The
functionality is only available if you run Network Video Management System Standard
Edition or Network Video Management System Standard Edition.
A master/slave setup (see "About master and slave " on page 138) allows you to
combine several servers and extend the total number of cameras you can use beyond
the maximum allowed number of cameras for a single server.
In such a setup, clients still have a single point of contact: they connect to the master
server but also get access, transparently, to cameras and recordings on the slave
servers. See Configure master and slave servers (on page 138).
Configure users
Specify who should access your system and how. Set a password protection for the
Management Application if needed. Decide who should have client access and which
rights they should have. See Manage user access wizard (on page 52), Add basic users
(on page 139), Add user groups (on page 140) and Configure user and group rights (on
page 141).
Configure Network Video Management System Download Manager
Manage which features users see on a targeted welcome page when they connect to the
system server. The features can include access to client applications, additional client
language versions, plug-ins and more. Network Video Management System Download
Manager comes with a default configuration that ensures that users get access to
Network Video Management System Smart Client in the same language as the system
server. See Use Network Video Management System Download Manager (on page 19).
The above list represents the configuration steps that most administrators are likely to cover. You
can configure and edit system settings to match the exact needs of your organization.
First time use
32
Network Video Management System Standard Edition 2016 R3 - Administrator Manual
Best practices
About protecting recording databases from corruption
You can select which action to take if a camera database becomes corrupted. The actions include
several database repair options. While it is good to have such options, Sony recommends that you
take steps to ensure that your camera databases do not become corrupted.
Power outages: use a UPS
The single-most common reason for corrupt databases is the recording server being shut down
abruptly, without files being saved and without the operating system being closed down properly.
This may happen due to power outages, due to somebody accidentally pulling out the server's
power cable, or similar.
The best way of protecting your recording servers from being shut down abruptly is to equip each
of your recording servers with a UPS (Uninterruptible Power Supply).
The UPS works as a battery-driven secondary power source, providing the necessary power for
saving open files and safely powering down your system in the event of power irregularities. UPSs
vary in sophistication, but many UPSs include software for automatically saving open files, for
alerting system administrators, etc.
Selecting the right type of UPS for your organization's environment is an individual process. When
you assess your needs, however, bear in mind the amount of runtime you require the UPS to be
able to provide if the power fails. Saving open files and shutting down an operating system
properly may take several minutes.
Windows Task Manager: be careful when you end processes
When you work in Windows Task Manager, be careful not to end any processes which affect the
surveillance system. If you end an application or system service by clicking End Process in the
Windows Task Manager, the process is not be given the chance to save its state or data before it is
terminated. This may lead to corrupt camera databases.
Windows Task Manager typically displays a warning if you attempt to end a process. Unless you are
absolutely sure that ending the process is not going to affect the surveillance system, click No
when the warning message asks you if you really want to terminate the process.
Hard disk failure: protect your drives
Hard disk drives are mechanical devices and are vulnerable to external factors. The following are
examples of external factors which may damage hard disk drives and lead to corrupt camera
databases:
•
Vibration (make sure the surveillance system server and its surroundings are stable)
•
Strong heat (make sure the server has adequate ventilation)
•
Strong magnetic fields (avoid)
•
Power outages (make sure you use a UPS (on page 193))
•
Static electricity (make sure you ground yourself if you are going to handle a hard disk
drive).
•
Fire, water and more (avoid).
First time use
33
Network Video Management System Standard Edition 2016 R3 - Administrator Manual
About saving changes to the configuration
As you set up your system, you must save any changes you make to the configuration in order for
these to be applied to the system. When you change the configuration in the Management
Application, for example in the Camera Summary or User Properties, a yellow notification bar
informs you that you have made changes to the configuration. The bar appears in order to make
sure that your changes are applied to the system. If you want to apply the changes, click Save. If
you do not want to save your changes, click Discard.
Once you have made changes to the configuration and saved these, your system contacts the
system services, including the Recording Server service and the Image Server service. If you make
changes to your configuration, for example if you change the name of a camera or change motion
detection settings, the relevant system services load the new configuration and the changes appear
in your client immediately. In contrast, more resource-demanding configuration changes, for
example if you add a new event, require that you restart the relevant services before they work
properly.
If you need to restart services, your system carries out the restart automatically once you have
saved the changes. If you make changes to settings in the NVMS Mobile server, your system
applies all changes when you click Save, without restarting the NVMS Mobile server service.
Important: While your system restarts services, you cannot view or record video. Restarting
services typically only takes a few seconds, but in order to minimize disruption, you may want to
restart services at a time when you do not expect that any important incidents take place. Users
connected to your system through clients can remain logged in during the restart of services, but
may experience a short video outage.
Note that the system stores changes in a restore point (see "Restore system configuration from a
restore point" on page 184) (so that you can return to a working configuration if something goes
wrong).
About using the help
•
To use the help, click the Help button in the Management Application or press the F1 key
on your keyboard.
The help is a built-in set of HTML files that opens in your default Internet browser. As the help
opens outside of the system, this allows you to switch between the help and the system itself. The
help system is context-sensitive. This means that when you access the help while you work in a
particular window or setting, help that matches that window/setting opens.
Use the help system
Use the help tabs Contents, Index, Search or use the links inside the help topics.
•
Contents: go through the help system based on a tree structure.
•
Index: contains an alphabetical indexation of help topics.
•
Search: search for help topics that contain particular terms of interest. As an example, you
can search for the term zoom and every help topic that contains the term zoom is listed in
the search results. When you double-click a help topic title in the search results list, the
relevant topic opens.
Print help topics
If you need to print a topic, use your Internet browser's printing function.
First time use
34
Network Video Management System Standard Edition 2016 R3 - Administrator Manual
About restarting services
Some changes in the Management Application require that your system restarts the Image Server
service or Recording Server service. See a list of these below:
Image Server
Recording Server
Change of port number
Changing licenses
Maximum number of clients
Changing event database path
Enabling or disabling of master
servers
Turning on manual recording
Adding or removing slave
servers
Starting on remote
Change of log path
Enabling and disabling of
notifications
Change of license
Changing events
Change of privacy mask
Changing outputs
Removal of hardware devices
Adding or removing a dynamic
archiving path
Adding or removing archiving
time
Changing of scheduling
Replacing hardware devices
Changing camera driver
Changing camera IP address
Deletion of all devices
Monitor storage space usage
To view how much storage space you have on your system—and not least how much of it is
free—do the following:
1. Expand Advanced Configuration, and select Cameras and Storage Information.
2. View the Storage Usage Summary for information about, which drives are available,
what drives are used for, the size of each drive, as well as how much video data, other
data, and free space there is in each drive.
View video from cameras in Management Application
You can view live video from single cameras directly in the Management Application:
1. Expand Advanced Configuration, and expand Cameras and Storage Information.
First time use
35
Network Video Management System Standard Edition 2016 R3 - Administrator Manual
2. Select the relevant camera to view live video from that camera. Above the live video, you
find a summary of the most important properties for the selected camera. Below the live
video, you find information about the camera's resolution and average image file size. For
cameras using MPEG or H.264, you also see the bit rate in Mbit/second.
Important: Viewing of live video in the Management Application may under certain circumstances
affect any simultaneous recording from the relevant camera.
Especially three scenarios are important to consider:
Some cameras supporting multistreaming may halve their frame rate or respond with other
negative effects if you open a second stream.
If a camera delivers live video in a very high quality, de-coding of images may increase the load on
the Recording Server service, which may in turn affect ongoing recordings negatively.
Cameras that do not support multiple simultaneous video streams cannot connect to the
surveillance server and the Management Application at the same time. Sony recommends that you
stop (see "Start and stop services" on page 147) the Recording Server service when you configure
such devices for motion detection and PTZ.
See also View video from cameras in the Management Application (see "View video from cameras
in Management Application" on page 35).
First time use
36
Network Video Management System Standard Edition 2016 R3 - Administrator Manual
Getting started
About the Getting started page
The Getting started page is always shown when you open the Management Application. The
Getting started page serves as a place of reference for users. It also provides different wizards
that help to configure your surveillance system quickly. After you have run the wizards, it is likely
that you need to fine-tune your system further. For more information, see the Advanced
configuration (on page 54) chapter in the help.
Under the License heading in the bottom-left part of the page, you can get an overview of your
system's hardware device licenses (on page 21) and your number of device changes without
activation (see "About device changes without activation" on page 23).
You can also access and view video tutorials that show and explain how to go through each step of
your system's wizards. To access the video tutorials, click the View tutorials link in the
bottom-right part of the page. The link takes you to an external web page with video tutorials for
your system.
Automatic configuration wizard
The Automatic configuration wizard is for easy configuration for first time use of the system.
Use the wizard to automatically add cameras to your system using this step-by-step procedure.
Automatic configuration wizard: First page
When you open the Management Application for the first time, the Automatic configuration wizard
opens to guide you through the process of adding hardware devices to your system.
If you are new to the system, click Yes, configure to scan your network for available cameras and
configure your system. To exit and use a more advanced way of adding devices to your system,
click Skip to leave the wizard and go to the Management Application to get more options for
setting up your system's device configuration.
Automatic configuration wizard: Scanning options
Choose where you want your system to scan for cameras and devices.
By default, the Scan local network checkbox is selected, which means that you only scan your
local network for devices. However, if you know the IP address or a range of IP addresses to which
cameras and devices are attached, specify these by clicking the Plus icon next to Add the IP
addresses or IP ranges to be scanned. You can add more than one range of IP addresses if you
need to.
Automatic configuration wizard: Select hardware
manufacturers to scan for
If you know the specific manufacturer of your hardware device(s), select these in the dropdown on
this page. You can select as many manufacturers as you want to.
Getting started
37
Network Video Management System Standard Edition 2016 R3 - Administrator Manual
Note: All manufacturers are selected by default. If you want to reduce the scanning time or know
the specific manufacturers of your cameras, only select the checkboxes that represent these
manufacturers.
Automatic configuration wizard: Scanning for hardware
devices
Scanning for hardware devices that match your selected manufacturers begins. A status bar
indicates how far in the scan process you are. Once scanning for cameras and devices is complete,
you may need to provide user name and password for your selected devices or cameras. When you
have typed in the relevant credentials, click the Verify button to add the device to your system.
Note: Not all devices and cameras need a user name and password. You can add such devices to
your system without any need to type in credentials.
Automatic configuration wizard: Continue after scan
Once you have added the number of devices and cameras you want to add, your system sets up
storage for you. Storage is the location to which your system saves recordings. By default, your
system chooses the location with most available disk space.
When the system has finished configuring storage, you are given the option to automatically add
new cameras to your system as they are detected on the network. Enabling this allows you to set
up your system so that any devices or cameras are automatically set up for you in the future as
soon as they are connected to your network. Note that not all devices and cameras support
automatic discovery. If your device/camera does not show up automatically after you have
connected it to your network, you must add it manually.
To go directly to Network Video Management System Smart Client once you have completed the
wizard, select the check box in the bottom-left corner of the wizard page.
Add hardware wizard
You add cameras and other hardware devices, such as video encoders, to your system through the
Add Hardware wizards. If the hardware device has microphones or speakers attached, the tool
automatically adds these as well.
You may have a limit on the number of cameras you can use in your system. Note that you can
add more cameras than you are allowed to use. If you use video encoder devices on your system,
note that many video encoder devices have more than one camera connected to them. For
example, a fully used four-port video encoder counts as four cameras.
The wizard offers you two different ways of adding cameras:
Scan for hardware
Scans your network for relevant hardware devices based on your
specifications regarding required IP ranges, discovery methods,
drivers, and device user names and passwords.
See Add hardware: Scan for hardware (see "Express" on page
39)
Getting started
38
Network Video Management System Standard Edition 2016 R3 - Administrator Manual
Specify details about each hardware device separately.
A good choice if you only want to add a few hardware devices,
and you know their IP addresses, required user names and
passwords and more.
Manually specify the
hardware to add
See Add hardware: Manually specify the hardware to add (see
"Manual" on page 40).
Alternatively, import data about cameras as comma-separated
values from a file. An effective method if you set up several
systems.
See Add hardware: Import from CSV File (see "Import from CSV
file" on page 41).
Express
Device discovery is a method with which hardware devices make information about themselves
available on the network. Based on such information, your system can quickly recognize relevant
hardware devices, such as cameras and video encoders, and include them in a scan.
The Scan for hardware method gives you the option to scan your network for relevant hardware
devices and quickly add them to your system in just a few steps.
Choose between these two options for adding hardware:
•
Scan local network: Perform an automated scan for available hardware on your local
network that support device discovery, on the part of your network (subnet) where the
system server itself is located.
•
Add IP address or IP range to be scanned: Add hardware to your system by indicating
IP ranges and ports from which the system begin scanning for hardware.
To use the Scan local network method, your system server and your cameras must be on the
same layer 2 network. This means that it must be on a network where all servers, cameras, and so
on can communicate without the need for a router. The reason for this is that device discovery
relies on direct communication between the system server and the cameras.
If you use routers on your network, specify the IP range where you hardware is located using the
Add IP address or IP range to be scanned-option or choose one of the Manually specify the
hardware to add (see "Manual" on page 40)-methods.
Add hardware: Scanning options
Choose where you want your system to scan for cameras and devices.
By default, the Scan local network checkbox is selected, which means that you only scan your
local network for devices. However, if you know the IP address or a range of IP addresses to which
cameras and devices are attached, specify these by clicking the Plus icon next to Add the IP
addresses or IP ranges to be scanned. You can add more than one range of IP addresses if you
need to.
Add hardware: Select hardware manufacturers to scan for
If you know the specific manufacturer of your hardware device(s), select these in the dropdown on
this page. You can select as many manufacturers as you want to.
Getting started
39
Network Video Management System Standard Edition 2016 R3 - Administrator Manual
Note: All manufacturers are selected by default. If you want to reduce the scanning time or know
the specific manufacturers of your cameras, only select the checkboxes that represent these
manufacturers.
Hardware detection and verification
Scanning for hardware devices that match your selected manufacturers begins. A status bar
indicates how far in the scan process you are. Once scanning for cameras and devices is complete,
you may need to provide user name and password for your selected devices or cameras. When you
have typed in the relevant credentials, click the Verify button to add the device to your system.
Note: Not all devices and cameras need a user name and password. You can add such devices to
your system without any need to type in credentials.
Once you have added the number of devices and cameras you want to add, your system sets up
storage for you. Storage is the location to which your system saves recordings. By default, your
system chooses the location with most available disk space.
Manual
With the Manually specify the hardware to add method, you can specify details about each
hardware device separately.
This options is a good choice if you only want to add a few hardware devices, and you know their
IP addresses, user names and passwords and so on. Similarly, automated searches on the local
network using the Scan for hardware option might not work for all cameras, for example
cameras using the system's Universal Driver. For such cameras, you must add these to the
system manually.
Alternatively, choose Import CSV file (see "Import from CSV file" on page 41). This option lets
you import data about hardware devices and cameras as comma-separated values (CSV) from a
file. This is a highly effective method if you set up several similar systems.
Information, driver selection and verification
Specify information about each hardware device you want to add:
Name
Description
IP Address
The IP address or host name of the hardware device.
The Port number on which to scan. The default is port 80.
Port
Getting started
If a hardware device is located behind a NAT-enabled router or a
firewall, you may need to specify a different port number. In such
cases, remember to configure the router/firewall so it maps the
port and IP address used by the hardware device.
40
Network Video Management System Standard Edition 2016 R3 - Administrator Manual
Name
Description
The user name for the hardware device's administrator account.
User Name
Many organizations use the hardware device manufacturer's
default user names for their hardware devices. If that is the case
in your organization, select "<default>". Do not type a
manufacturer's default user name as this can be a source of
error, trust that your system knows the manufacturer's default
user name.
You can also select other typical user names, such as admin or
root, from the list. Type a new user name if you want a user
name which is not on the list.
Password
The password required to access the administrator account. Some
hardware devices do not require user name/password for access.
Driver
The driver to scan for your hardware device. By default, the
wizard shows the Autodetect option. The Autodetect option finds
the relevant driver automatically. Select a manufacturer if you
know the specific manufacturer to reduce scanning time.
Once you have added the number of devices and cameras you want to add, your system sets up
storage for you. Storage is the location to which your system saves recordings. By default, your
system chooses the location with most available disk space.
Import from CSV file
Import data about hardware devices and cameras as comma-separated values (CSV) from a file.
This is a highly effective method if you set up several similar systems.
Add Hardware Devices wizard - Import from CSV File - example of
CSV file
The following is an example of a CSV file for use when cameras and server are online.
It includes the parameters HardwareAddress, HardwarePort, HardwareUsername,
HardwarePassword and HardwareDriverID. Note that HardwareUserName and
HardwareDriverID are optional parameters.
You can leave out the HardwareUsername if you have not changed the default HardwareUsername
for the device. HardwareDriverID is an optional field. If empty, it is automatically set to autodetect.
HardwareAddress;HardwarePort;HardwareUsername;HardwarePassword;HardwareDrive
rID;
192.168.200.220;80;root;pass;128;
192.168.200.221;80;user;password;165;
192.168.200.222;80;r00t;pass;172;
192.168.200.223;80;;p4ss;
192.168.200.224;80;usEr;pASs;
Getting started
41
Network Video Management System Standard Edition 2016 R3 - Administrator Manual
Add hardware: Import from CSV file - CSV file format and
requirements
The CSV file must have a header line (determining what each value on the following lines is about),
and the following lines must each contain information about one hardware device only. For each
hardware device, the following information is required:
HardwareAddress
The IP address of the hardware device.
HardwareUsername
The user name for hardware device's administrator account.
HardwarePassword
The password for hardware device's administrator account.
HardwareDriverID
If cameras and server are offline: specify a HardwareDriverID
for each hardware device you want to add.
Example: ACTi ACD-2100 105 indicates that you should use
105 as the ID if adding an ACTi ACD-2100 hardware device.
Existing configuration parameters that are not specified in CSV file remain unchanged. If a
parameter value for an individual camera in the CSV file is empty, the existing parameter value
remains unchanged on that camera.
You can store hardware device information in spreadsheets as found in, for example, Microsoft
Excel to save the information as comma-separated values in a CSV file.
The following applies for the information present in CSV files:
•
The first line of the CSV file must contain the headers, and following lines must contain
information about one hardware device each
•
Separators can be commas, semicolons or tabs, but you cannot mix them
•
All lines must contain valid values. All camera names, user names and similar items must
be unique, and cannot contain any of the following special characters: <
> & ' " \ / : * ? | [ ]
•
There is no fixed order of values, and you can omit optional parameters entirely
•
Boolean fields are considered true unless set to 0, false or no
•
Lines containing only separators are ignored
•
Empty lines are ignored.
Even though the CSV file format is generally ASCII only, Unicode identifiers are allowed. Even
without Unicode identifiers, the entire file or even individual characters can be Unicode strings.
Configure storage wizard
The Video storage step helps you quickly configure your cameras' video and recording properties.
Configure storage: Video settings and preview
Control bandwidth, brightness, compression, contrast, resolution, rotation and more in Video
settings. Use the list on the left side of the wizard window to select a camera and adjust its video
settings. Then select the next camera and adjust its settings. Video settings are to a large extent
camera-specific, so you must configure these settings individually for each camera.
Getting started
42
Network Video Management System Standard Edition 2016 R3 - Administrator Manual
Click Open Settings Dialog to configure the camera's settings in a separate dialog. When you
change video settings, they are applied immediately. This means that—for most cameras—you can
immediately see the effect of your settings in a preview image. However, it also means that you
cannot undo your changes by exiting the wizard. For cameras set to use the video formats MPEG or
H.264, you can typically select which live frame rate to use for the camera.
Video settings may feature an Include Date and Time setting. If set to Yes, date and time from
the camera are included in the video. Note, however, that cameras are separate units which may
have separate timing devices, power supplies, etc. Camera time and Network Video Management
System time may therefore not correspond fully, and this may occasionally lead to confusion. As
your system time-stamps all frames upon reception, and exact date and time information for each
image is already known, Sony recommends that you set it to No.
Note: For consistent time synchronization, you may automatically synchronize camera and system
time through a time server if your camera supports this.
Configure storage: Online schedule
Specify when each camera should be online. An online camera is a camera that transfers video to
the server for live viewing and further processing. The fact that a camera is online does not in itself
mean that your system records video from the camera (configure recording settings on one of the
following pages). By default, cameras you add to your system are automatically online (Always
on), and you only need to modify their online schedules if you require cameras to be online only at
specific times or events. Note, however, that you can change this default as part of the scheduling
options (on page 123).
For each camera, you can initially select between two online schedules:
•
Always on: The camera is always online.
•
Always off: The camera is never online.
If these two options are too simple for your needs, use the Create / Edit... button to specify
online schedules according to your needs, and then select these schedules for your cameras. This
way, you can specify whether cameras should be online within specific periods of time, or whether
they should start and stop transferring video when specific events occur within specific periods of
time.
The template can help you configure similar properties quickly. For example, if you have 20
cameras and you want a particular frame rate on all of them, you can enter it once in the template,
and then apply the template to the 20 cameras.
Name
Description
Apply Template
Select which cameras you want to apply the template for. Use
one of the two Set buttons to actually apply the template.
Select All
Click button to select all cameras in the Apply Template column.
Clear All
Click button to clear all selections in the Apply Template
column.
Apply template on selected
cameras
Apply the value from the template to selected cameras.
Getting started
43
Network Video Management System Standard Edition 2016 R3 - Administrator Manual
Configure storage: Live and recording settings (motion
JPEG cameras)
This wizard page only appears if one or more of your cameras use the MJPEG video format.
Select pre- and post-recording, which allows you to store recordings from the time before and after
detected motion and/or specified events. Also specify which frame rates to use for each camera.
Pre-recording
You can store recordings from periods preceding detected motion
and/or start events. Select the check box to enable this feature.
Specify the relevant number of seconds in the neighboring
column.
Seconds [of pre-recording]
Specify the number of seconds for which you want to record video
from before recording start conditions (that is motion or start
event) are met. Usually, only some seconds of pre-recording is
required, but you can specify up to 65535 seconds of
pre-recording, corresponding to 18 hours, 12 minutes and 15
seconds. However, if specifying a very long pre-recording time,
you can potentially run into a scenario where your pre-recording
time spans scheduled or unscheduled archiving (see "About
archiving" on page 116) times. That can be problematic since
pre-recording does not work well during archiving.
Post-recording
You can store recordings from periods following detected motion
and/or stop events. Select check box to enable this feature.
Specify the required number of seconds in the neighboring
column.
Seconds [of post-recording]
Specify the number of seconds for which you want to record video
from after recording stop conditions (that is motion or stop event)
are met. Usually, only some seconds of post-recording is
required, but you can specify up to 65535 seconds of
post-recording, corresponding to 18 hours, 12 minutes and 15
seconds. However, if specifying a very long post-recording time,
you can potentially run into a scenario where your post-recording
time spans scheduled or unscheduled archiving times. That can
be problematic since post-recording does not work well during
archiving.
Frame Rate
Required average frame rate for video from the camera. Select
the number of frames, then select the time unit interval (second,
minute or hour).
Live Frame Rate
Recording Frame Rate
Getting started
Required average frame rate for live video from the camera.
Select the number of frames, then select the time unit interval
(second, minute or hour).
If the camera supports dual stream and you have enabled dual
stream, the Live Frame Rate column is read-only with the value
Dual streaming. You cannot change this.
Required average frame rate for recorded video from the camera.
Select the number of frames, then select the time unit interval
(second, minute or hour). The frame rate must be higher than
the frame rate specified under normal mode.
44
Network Video Management System Standard Edition 2016 R3 - Administrator Manual
The template can help you configure similar properties quickly. For example, if you have 20
cameras and you want a particular frame rate on all of them, you can enter it once in the template,
and then apply the template to the 20 cameras.
Apply Template
Select which cameras you want to apply the template for. Use
one of the two Set buttons to actually apply the template.
Select All
Click button to select all cameras in the Apply Template column.
Clear All
Click button to clear all selections in the Apply Template
column.
Apply template on selected
cameras
Apply the value from the template to selected cameras.
Configure storage: Live and recording settings H.264/MPEG4 cameras
This wizard page only appears if one or more of your cameras use the H.264/MPEG4 video format.
Specify which frame rate to use for each camera, and whether to record all frames or keyframes
only. You can also select pre- and post-recording, allowing you to store recordings from periods
preceding and following detected motion and/or specified events.
Note that all of the properties can also be specified individually for each camera.
Live Frame Rate
The required average frame rate for live video from the camera.
Select the number of frames, then select the time unit interval
(second, minute or hour).
If the camera supports dual stream and you have enabled dual
stream, the Live Frame Rate column is read-only with the value
Dual streaming. You cannot change this.
Select under which conditions video from the camera should be
recorded:
Record on
•
Always: Record whenever the camera is enabled (see
"General" on page 81) and scheduled to be online (see
"Online period" on page 124). The latter option allows for
time-based recording.
•
Never: Never record. Live video is shown, but users cannot
play back video from the camera because no video is kept in
the database.
•
Event: Select this to record video when motion (see "Motion
detection & exclude regions" on page 90) is detected. Unless
you add post-recording, recording stops immediately after the
last motion is detected.
Use the Configure events list located below the other fields to
define events that suit your needs.
•
Getting started
Motion Detection and Event: Select this to record video in
which motion is detected, or when an event occurs and until
another event occurs. Remember to select start and stop
events in the neighboring columns.
45
Network Video Management System Standard Edition 2016 R3 - Administrator Manual
Pre-recording
You can store recordings from periods preceding detected motion
and/or start events. Select check box to enable this feature.
Specify the required number of seconds in the neighboring
column.
Seconds [of pre-recording]
Specify the number of seconds for which you want to record video
from before recording start conditions (that is motion or start
event) are met. Usually, only some seconds of pre-recording is
required, but you can specify up to 65535 seconds of
pre-recording, corresponding to 18 hours, 12 minutes and 15
seconds. However, if specifying a very long pre-recording time,
you can potentially run into a scenario where your pre-recording
time spans scheduled or unscheduled archiving (see "About
archiving" on page 116) times. That can be problematic since
pre-recording does not work well during archiving.
Post-recording
You can store recordings from periods following detected motion
and/or stop events. Select check box to enable this feature.
Specify the required number of seconds in the neighboring
column.
Seconds [of post-recording]
Specify the number of seconds for which you want to record video
from after recording stop conditions (that is motion or stop event)
are met. Usually, only some seconds of post-recording is
required, but you can specify up to 65535 seconds of
post-recording, corresponding to 18 hours, 12 minutes and 15
seconds. However, if specifying a very long post-recording time,
you can potentially run into a scenario where your post-recording
time spans scheduled or unscheduled archiving times. That can
be problematic since post-recording does not work well during
archiving.
Keyframe Only
Select Keyframe only if you want motion detection to take place
only on keyframes of the video stream to reduce the system
resources used on motion detection.
The template can help you configure similar properties quickly. For example, if you have 20
cameras and you want a particular frame rate on all of them, you can enter it once in the template,
and then apply the template to the 20 cameras.
Name
Description
Apply Template
Select which cameras you want to apply the template for. Use
one of the two Set buttons to actually apply the template.
Select All
Click button to select all cameras in the Apply Template column.
Clear All
Click button to clear all selections in the Apply Template
column.
Apply template on selected
cameras
Apply the value from the template to selected cameras.
Configure storage: Drive selection
Specify which drives you want to store cameras' recordings on. You can specify separate
drives/paths for recording and archiving (see "About archiving" on page 116).
Getting started
46
Network Video Management System Standard Edition 2016 R3 - Administrator Manual
Drive
For example the C:\ drive.
Select what you want to use the drive for:
Not in use: Do not use the drive.
Recording: Only available if the drive is a local drive on the
surveillance system server. Network drives cannot be used for
recording. Use the drive for storing recordings in the regular
database for the system.
Purpose
Archiving: Use the drive for archiving. For archiving, it is
generally a good idea to use a drive which has plenty of space.
With dynamic path selection for archives, you do not have to
worry about drive space.
Rec. & Archiving: Only available if the drive is a local drive on
the surveillance system server. Network drives cannot be used for
recording. Use the drive for storing recordings in the regular
database for the system as well as for archiving.
The path to the folder in which to store the camera's database.
The default path is C:\MediaDatabase.
Recording Path
To browse for another folder, click the browse icon next to the
required cell. You can only specify a path to a folder on a local
drive. You cannot specify a path to a network drive. If you use a
network drive, you cannot save recordings if the network drive
becomes unavailable.
If you change the recording path, and you have existing
recordings at the old location, you are asked whether you want to
move the recordings to the new location, leave them at the old
location, or delete them.
If you have several cameras, and several local drives are
available, you can improve performance by distributing individual
cameras' databases across several drives.
You can only edit this if you do not use dynamic paths for
archiving (see "About archiving" on page 116). Path to the folder
in which the camera's archived recordings should be stored.
Default is C:\MediaDatabase.
Archiving Path
To browse for another folder, click the browse icon next to the
relevant cell. If you change the archiving path, and there are
existing archived recordings at the old location, you are asked
whether you want to move the archived recordings to the new
location (recommended), leave them at the old location, or delete
them. Note that if you move archived recordings, your system
also archives what is currently in the camera database. In case
you wonder why the camera database is empty just after you
have moved archived recordings, this is the reason.
Total Size
Total size of the drive.
Free Space
Amount of unused space left on the drive.
Getting started
47
Network Video Management System Standard Edition 2016 R3 - Administrator Manual
Dynamic path selection for
archives
If using this option (highly recommended), you should select a
number of different local drives for archiving. If the path
containing the surveillance system database is on one of the
drives you have selected for archiving, the system always tries to
archive to that drive first. If not, the system automatically
archives to the archiving drive with the most available space at
any time, provided there is not a camera database using that
drive.
Which drive has the most available space may change during the
archiving process, and archiving may therefore happen to several
archiving drives during the same process. This fact has no impact
on how users find and view archived recordings.
Archiving Times
Specify when you want your system to automatically move
recordings to your archiving path(s). You can specify up to 24
archiving times per day, with minimum one hour between each
one. Select the hour, minute and second values and click the up
and down buttons to increase or decrease values, or simply
overwrite the selected value, and then click Add. The more you
expect to record, the more often you should archive.
Network Drive
Lets you add a network drive to the list of drives. First specify the
network drive, then click Add (the button becomes available
when you specify a network drive) . Note that network drives
cannot be used for recording, only for archiving.
Configure storage: Recording and archiving settings
Select recording and archiving (see "About archiving" on page 116) paths for each individual
camera.
You can edit all properties on a white background. you cannot edit properties on a light blue
background.
Name
Description
Path to the folder in which the camera's database should be
stored. Default is C:\MediaDatabase. To browse for another
folder, click the browse icon next to the required cell. You can
only specify a path to a folder on a local drive. You cannot
specify a path to a network drive. If you use a network drive, you
cannot save recordings if the network drive becomes unavailable.
Recording Path
If you change the recording path, and you have existing
recordings at the old location, you are asked whether you want to
move the recordings to the new location, leave them at the old
location, or delete them.
If you have several cameras, and several local drives are
available, you can improve performance by distributing individual
cameras' databases across several drives.
Getting started
48
Network Video Management System Standard Edition 2016 R3 - Administrator Manual
Name
Description
Only editable if not using dynamic paths for archiving (see "About
archiving" on page 116). Path to the folder in which the camera's
archived recordings should be stored. Default is
C:\MediaDatabase.
Archiving Path
To browse for another folder, click the browse icon next to the
relevant cell. If you change the archiving path, and there are
existing archived recordings at the old location, you are asked
whether you want to move the archived recordings to the new
location (recommended), leave them at the old location, or delete
them. Note that if you move archived recordings, your system
also archives what is currently in the camera database. In case
you wonder why the camera database is empty just after you
have moved archived recordings, this is the reason.
Total amount of time for which you want to keep recordings from
the camera (that is, recordings in the camera's database as well
as any archived recordings). The default retention time is 7 days.
Retention time
Retention time covers the total amount of time you want to keep
recordings for. In earlier versions of your surveillance system,
you specified time limits separately for the database and
archives.
The template can help you configure similar properties quickly. For example, if you have 20
cameras and you want a particular frame rate on all of them, you can enter it once in the template,
and then apply the template to the 20 cameras.
Name
Description
Apply Template
Select which cameras you want to apply the template for. Use
one of the two Set buttons to actually apply the template.
Select All
Click button to select all cameras in the Apply Template column.
Clear All
Click button to clear all selections in the Apply Template
column.
Apply template on selected
cameras
Apply the value from the template to selected cameras.
Adjust motion detection wizard
The Adjust Motion Detection wizard helps you quickly configure your cameras' motion detection
properties.
Cameras that do not support multiple simultaneous video streams cannot connect to the
surveillance server and the Management Application at the same time. Sony recommends that you
stop (see "Start and stop services" on page 147) the Recording Server service when you configure
such devices for motion detection and PTZ.
See also View video from cameras in the Management Application (see "View video from cameras
in Management Application" on page 35).
Getting started
49
Network Video Management System Standard Edition 2016 R3 - Administrator Manual
Adjust motion detection: Exclude regions
Disable motion detection in specific areas of cameras' views in the Exclude regions section of the
wizard. Disabling motion detection in certain areas may help you avoid detection of irrelevant
motion, for example if a camera covers an area where a tree is swaying in the wind or where cars
regularly pass by in the background.
Cameras that do not support multiple simultaneous video streams cannot connect to the
surveillance server and the Management Application at the same time. Sony recommends that you
stop (see "Start and stop services" on page 147) the Recording Server service when you configure
such devices for motion detection and PTZ. See also View video from cameras in the Management
Application (see "View video from cameras in Management Application" on page 35).
For each camera for which exclude regions are relevant, use the list in the left side of the wizard
window to select the camera and define its exclude regions. Exclude regions are camera-specific,
and you must configured motion detection individually for each camera on which they are required.
When you have selected a camera, you see a preview from the camera. You define regions to
exclude in the preview, which is divided into small sections by a grid.
•
To make the grid visible, select the Show Grid check box.
•
To define exclude regions, drag the mouse pointer over the required areas in the preview
while pressing the mouse button down. Left mouse button selects a grid section and right
mouse button clears a grid section. Selected areas are highlighted in blue.
If you use the Exclude All button, you can quickly select all grid sections in the preview. This can
be a good idea if you want to disable motion detection in most areas of the preview, in which case
you can clear the few sections in which you do not want to disable motion detection. With the
Include All button, you can quickly clear all sections.
Adjust motion detection: Motion detection
Motion detection is a key element in most surveillance systems. Depending on your configuration,
motion detection settings may determine when video is recorded (saved on the surveillance system
server), when notifications are sent, when output (a light or siren) is triggered and more.
It is important that you find the best possible motion detection settings for each camera to avoid
unnecessary recordings, notifications and more. Depending on the physical location of your
cameras, it is a good idea to test settings under different physical conditions (day/night,
windy/calm weather and similar conditions).
Cameras that do not support multiple simultaneous video streams cannot connect to the
surveillance server and the Management Application at the same time. Sony recommends that you
stop (see "Start and stop services" on page 147) the Recording Server service when you configure
such devices for motion detection and PTZ. See also View video from cameras in Management
Application (on page 35).
Getting started
50
Network Video Management System Standard Edition 2016 R3 - Administrator Manual
You can configure motion detection settings for each camera, or for several cameras at once. Use
the list in the left pane of the wizard window to select cameras. To select several cameras at a time,
press CTRL or SHIFT while you select. When you select a camera, you see a preview from that
camera. If you select several cameras, you see a preview from the last camera you select. A green
area in the preview indicates motion.
Name
Description
Adjust the Sensitivity slider so that irrelevant background noise
is filtered out, and only real motion is shown in green.
Alternatively, specify a value between 0 and 256 in the field next
to the slider to control the sensitivity setting.
Sensitivity
Motion
The slider determines how much each pixel must change before it
is regarded as motion. With a high sensitivity, very little change
in a pixel is required before it is regarded as motion. The more
you drag the slider to the left, the more of the preview becomes
green. This is because with high sensitivity, even the slightest
pixel change is regarded as motion.
Adjust the Motion slider so that motion detection is only
triggered by the required level of motion. The selected motion
level is indicated by the black vertical line in the Level bar above
the sliders. The black vertical line serves as a threshold. When
motion is above (to the right of) the selected level, the bar
changes color from green to red, indicating a positive motion
detection.
Alternatively, specify a value between 0 and 10000 in the field on
the left to control the motion setting.
The more you drag the slider to the left, the more positive motion
detections you see because less change will be needed to trigger
a positive motion detection. The number of positive motion
detections may also affect the amount of video you record, the
amount of notifications you receive and more.
Detection interval
Specify how often motion detection analysis is carried out on
video from the camera. The default is every 240 milliseconds
(close to once a quarter of a second). The interval is applied
regardless of your cameras' frame rate settings.
Adjusting this setting can help lower the amount of system
resources used on motion detection.
Getting started
51
Network Video Management System Standard Edition 2016 R3 - Administrator Manual
Name
Description
Detection resolution
Specify whether the full image or a selected percentage of the
image should be analyzed. For example, by specifying 25%,
every fourth pixel is analyzed instead of all pixels, reducing the
system resources used but also offering less accurate motion
detection.
Keyframe Only
Select Keyframe only if you want motion detection to take place
only on keyframes of the video stream to reduce the system
resources used on motion detection.
Manage user access wizard
Use the Manage user access step to add individual users so they can access the system and its
clients. The access summary at the end of the wizard lists the cameras your users have access to.
Important: When you use the wizard, all users you add get access to all cameras, including any
new cameras added at a later stage. You can, however, specify access settings, users and user
rights (see "Configure user and group rights" on page 141) separately, see Configure server access
(on page 135). You cannot add users to groups (see "Add user groups" on page 140).
Manage user access: Basic and Windows users
You can add client users in two ways. You can combine these if you need to.
Name
Description
Basic user
Create a dedicated surveillance system user account with basic
user name and password authentication for each individual user.
Windows user
Import users defined locally on the server and authenticate them
based on their Windows login.
You must define users as local PC users on the server and disable simple file sharing on the server.
Add Basic users
1. Specify a user name and password, and click the Add Basic User button. Repeat as
required.
Add Windows users
1. Click Add Windows User to open the Select Users or Groups dialog. You can only make
selections from the local computer, even if you click the Locations button.
2. In Enter the object names to select, enter the user name(s), then use the Check
Names feature to verify the user name. If you enter several user names, separate each
name with a semicolon. Example: Brian; Hannah; Karen; Wayne.
3. When done, click OK.
Getting started
52
Network Video Management System Standard Edition 2016 R3 - Administrator Manual
Important: When a user who has been added from a local database logs in with a client, the user
should not specify any server name, PC name, or IP address as part of the user name. Example of
a correctly specified user name: USER001, not: PC001/USER001. The user should, of course, still
specify a password and any relevant server information.
Manage user access: Access summary
The access summary lists which cameras your users have access to. When you use the wizard, all
users you have added have access all to cameras, including any new cameras added at a later
stage. You can, however, limit individual users' access to cameras by changing their individual
rights (see "Configure user and group rights" on page 141).
Getting started
53
Network Video Management System Standard Edition 2016 R3 - Administrator Manual
Advanced configuration
Hardware devices
About hardware devices
You add cameras and other hardware devices, such as video encoders, to your system through the
Add Hardware Devices... wizard (see "Add hardware wizard" on page 38). If microphones or
speakers are attached to a hardware device, they are automatically added as well, if your software
version supports this.
About microphones
In your system, Microphones are typically attached to hardware devices, and therefore physically
located next to cameras. Operators, with the necessary rights, can listen to recordings through
Network Video Management System Smart Client if the computer running Network Video
Management System Smart Client has speakers attached. You manage microphones on your
system, meaning you can always manage the microphones attached to cameras, not microphones
attached to Network Video Management System Smart Client operators' computers.
If you have added more microphones to your system than you need, you can hide the ones you do
not need by right-clicking the relevant microphone or speaker and select Hide. If you need the
hidden microphone again, you can right-click the overall microphone icon and select Show Hidden
Items.
About speakers
Speakers are attached to devices, and typically physically located next to cameras. They can
typically transmit information to people near a camera. Operators with the necessary rights can
talk through speakers using Network Video Management System Smart Client provided the
computer running Network Video Management System Smart Client has a microphone attached.
Example: An elevator is stuck. Through a camera mounted in the elevator, Network Video
Management System Smart Client operators can see that there is an elderly lady in the elevator. A
microphone attached to the camera records that the lady says: “I am afraid. Please help me out!”
Through a speaker attached to the camera, operators can tell the lady that: “Help is on its way.
You should be out in less than fifteen minutes.”
If you have added more speakers to your system than you need, you can hide the ones you do not
need by right-clicking the relevant peaker and select Hide. If you need the hidden speaker again,
you can right-click the overall speaker icon and select Show Hidden Items.
About recording audio
If you record audio, it is important that you note the following:
•
Your system only records incoming audio (from microphones). The system does not record
outgoing audio (from speakers).
Advanced configuration
54
Network Video Management System Standard Edition 2016 R3 - Administrator Manual
•
Audio recording affects video storage capacity. The system records audio to the associated
camera’s database. Therefore, it is important to bear in mind that the database is likely to
become full earlier if you record audio and video than if you only record video. The fact that
the database becomes full is not in itself a problem since your system automatically
archives data if the database becomes full. However, you may need additional archiving
space if you record audio.
•
Example: If you use MPEG4, each one-second video GOP (Group Of Pictures) are
stored in one record in the database. Each second of audio is stored in one record in
the database. This reduces the database’s video storage capacity to half its capacity,
because half of the database’s records is used for storing audio. Consequently, the
database runs full sooner, and automatic archiving takes place more often than if
you were only recording video.
•
Example: If you use MJPEG, audio is stored in one record for every JPEG for as long
as the audio block size does not exceed the time between the JPEGs. In extreme
cases, this reduces the database’s video storage capacity to half its capacity,
because half of the database’s records is used for storing audio. If you use very
high frame rates, which means less time between each JPEG, a smaller portion of
the database is used for storing audio records, and consequently a larger portion is
available for storing video. The result is that the database runs full sooner, and
automatic archiving takes place more often than if you were only recording video.
The above examples are simplified. The exact available video storage capacity also depends on
GOP/JPEG and audio kilobyte size.
About dedicated input/output devices
You can add a number of dedicated input/output (I/O) hardware devices to your system. For
information about which I/O hardware devices your system supports, see the release notes.
When you add I/O hardware devices, input on them can be used for generating events in your
system and events in your system can be used for activating output on the I/O hardware devices.
This means that you can use I/O hardware devices in your events-based system setup in the same
way as a camera.
With certain I/O hardware devices, the surveillance system must regularly check the state of the
hardware devices' input ports to detect whether input has been received. Such state checking at
regular intervals is called polling. The interval between state checks, called a polling frequency,
is specified as part of the general ports and polling properties (see "Ports and polling" on page 107).
For such I/O hardware devices, the polling frequency should be set to the lowest possible value
(one tenth of a second between state checks). For information about which I/O hardware devices
require polling, see the release notes.
Show or hide microphones or speakers
If you have added more microphones or speakers to your system than you need, you can hide the
ones you do not need by right-clicking the relevant microphone or speaker and select Hide. If you
need the hidden microphone/speaker again, you can right-click the overall microphone or speaker
icon and select Show Hidden Items.
Configure hardware devices
Once you have added hardware devices, you can specify/edit device-specific properties including:
the IP address, which video channels to use, which COM ports to use for controlling attached PTZ
cameras and whether to use Fisheye lens technology.
Advanced configuration
55
Network Video Management System Standard Edition 2016 R3 - Administrator Manual
1. Expand Advanced Configuration, expand Hardware Devices, right-click the relevant
hardware device, and select Properties.
2. Specify Name and video channels, Network, device type and license (see "Network, device
type, and license" on page 59), PTZ device (see "PTZ device (properties)" on page 60), and
Fisheye lens properties as required.
3. Save your configuration changes by clicking Save in the yellow notification bar in the
upper-right corner of the Management Application.
Delete/disable hardware devices
Important: If you delete a hardware device, you not only delete all cameras, speakers and
microphones attached to the hardware device. You also delete any recordings from cameras on the
hardware device.
1. Expand Advanced Configuration, expand Hardware Devices, right-click the hardware
device you want to delete, and select Delete Hardware device.
2. Confirm that you want to delete the hardware device and all its recordings.
3. Save your configuration changes by clicking Save in the yellow notification bar in the
upper-right corner of the Management Application.
4. Restart (see "Start and stop services" on page 147) the Recording Server service.
Alternately, you can also consider disabling the individual cameras, speakers or microphones
connected to the hardware device:
1. Expand Advanced Configuration, expand Hardware Devices, and expand the relevant
hardware device.
2. Right-click the camera, microphone or speaker that you want to disable, and select
Disable.
3. Save your configuration changes by clicking Save in the yellow notification bar in the
upper-right corner of the Management Application.
4. Restart (see "Start and stop services" on page 147) the Recording Server service.
About replacing hardware devices
You can replace a hardware device that you have added and configured on your system with a new
one, for example to replace a physical camera on your network.
Open the Replace Hardware Device wizard (see "About the Replace Hardware Device wizard" on
page 57), which helps you through the entire replacement process on the surveillance system
server, including:
•
Detecting the new hardware device
•
Specifying license for the new hardware device
•
Deciding what to do with existing recordings from the old hardware device
Advanced configuration
56
Network Video Management System Standard Edition 2016 R3 - Administrator Manual
About the Replace Hardware Device wizard
Use the Replace Hardware Device wizard to replace a hardware device that you have previously
added to and configured on your surveillance system. To open the Replace Hardware Device wizard,
right-click the device that you want to replace and select Replace Hardware Device. The wizard
is divided into the New hardware device information page and the database action page.
New hardware device information
Specify details about the new hardware device:
IP Address
The IP address or host name of the hardware device.
The Port number on which to scan. The default is port 80.
If a hardware device is located behind a NAT-enabled router or a
firewall, you may need to specify a different port number. In such
cases, remember to configure the router/firewall so it maps the
port and IP address used by the hardware device.
Port
The user name for the hardware device's administrator account.
User Name
Many organizations use the hardware device manufacturer's
default user names for their hardware devices. If that is the case
in your organization, select "<default>". Do not type a
manufacturer's default user name as this can be a source of
error, trust that your system knows the manufacturer's default
user name.
You can also select other typical user names, such as admin or
root, from the list. Type a new user name if you want a user
name which is not on the list.
Password
The password required to access the administrator account. Some
hardware devices do not require user name/password for access.
Device driver
To specify which device driver to use for the new hardware device, you can:
•
Select the video device driver in the Hardware device type list, and then click
Auto-detect/Verify Hardware Device Type to verify that the driver matches the
hardware device.
- or -
•
Click Auto-detect/Verify Hardware Device Type to automatically detect and verify the
right driver.
When the right driver is found, the Serial number (MAC address) field displays the MAC address
of the new hardware device. When done, click Next.
Camera and database action
On the last page of the Replace Hardware wizard, decide what to do with the camera and the
database containing recordings from the camera attached to the old hardware device. For
multi-camera devices, such as video encoders, you must decide what to do for each video channel
on the new hardware device.
Advanced configuration
57
Network Video Management System Standard Edition 2016 R3 - Administrator Manual
The table in the left side of the wizard page lists available video channels on the new hardware
device. For a regular single-camera hardware device, there are only one video channel. For video
encoders, there are typically several video channels.
1. For each video channel, use the table's Inherit column to select which camera from the old
hardware device should be inherited by the new hardware device.
2. Decide what to do with camera databases. You have three options:
•
Inherit existing database(s): The cameras you selected to be inherited by the
new hardware device inherit camera names, recordings databases as well as any
archives from the old hardware device. Databases and archives are renamed to
reflect the new hardware device's MAC address and video channels. The rights of
users with access to the inherited cameras are automatically updated so they can
view both old and new recordings. Users do not notice the hardware device
replacement since camera names remain the same.
•
Delete the existing database(s): The databases of the cameras you selected to
be inherited by the new hardware device are not deleted. New databases are
created for future recordings, but it is not possible to view recordings from before
the hardware replacement.
•
Leave the existing database(s): The databases of the cameras you selected to
be inherited by the new hardware device are not deleted. New databases are
created for future recordings, but even though the old databases still exist on the
System server, it is not possible to view recordings from before the hardware
replacement. Should you later want to delete the old databases, you must delete
this manually.
3. If the new hardware device has fewer video channels than the old hardware device, it is
not possible for the new hardware device to inherit all cameras from the old hardware
device. When that is the case, you are asked what to do with the databases of cameras
that could not be inherited by the new hardware device. You have two options:
•
Delete the databases for the cameras that are not inherited: The databases
of the cameras that could not be inherited by the new hardware devices are deleted.
It is not possible to view recordings from before the hardware replacement. New
databases are, of course, created for future recordings by the new hardware
devices.
•
Leave the databases for the cameras that are not inherited: The databases of
the cameras that could not be inherited by the new hardware devices are not
deleted. Even though the old databases still exist on the System server, it is not
possible to view recordings from before the hardware replacement. Should you later
want to delete the old databases, you must delete this manually. New databases
will, of course, be created for future recordings by the new hardware devices.
4. Click Finish. When you are ready, restart the Recording Server service. The hardware
replacement are not evident in clients until you restart the Recording Server service.
Speaker properties
When you configure video and recording (see "About video and recording configuration" on page
61) for specific cameras, you can determine when to record audio. Your choice applies for all
cameras on your system.
Advanced configuration
58
Network Video Management System Standard Edition 2016 R3 - Administrator Manual
Enabled
Speakers are by default enabled, meaning they can transfer audio
to your system. If required, you can disable an individual
speaker, in which case no audio is transferred from the speaker
to the system.
Speaker name
The name as it appears in the Management Application as well as
in clients. You can overwrite the existing name with a new one.
Names must be unique, and must not contain any of these special
characters: < > & ' " \ / : * ? | [ ]
Hardware properties
Hardware name and video channels
When you configure hardware devices, specify the following properties:
Hardware name
Video channel # enabled
The name as it appears in the Management Application as well as
in clients. You can overwrite the existing name with a new one.
Names must be unique, and must not contain any of these special
characters: < > & ' " \ / : * ? | [ ]
Enable/disable each of the selected hardware device's video
channels. Many hardware devices only have a single video
channel, in which case only one channel is listed.
Other hardware devices, typically video encoder devices, have
several video channels.
Network, device type, and license
When you configure hardware devices (on page 55), specify the following properties:
IP Address
The IP address or host name of the hardware device.
HTTP Port
The port to use for HTTP communication with the hardware
device. The default is port 80. To use the default port, select Use
default HTTP port.
FTP port
The port to use for FTP communication with the hardware device.
The default port is port 21. To use the default port, select Use
default FTP port.
User name
Only relevant when you have selected Server requires login.
Specify the user name required for using the SMTP server.
Advanced configuration
59
Network Video Management System Standard Edition 2016 R3 - Administrator Manual
The user name for the hardware device's administrator account.
User Name
Many organizations use the hardware device manufacturer's
default user names for their hardware devices. To do so, select
"<default>". Do not type a manufacturer's default user name as
this can be a source of error. Trust that your system knows the
manufacturer's default user name.
You can also select other typical user names, such as admin or
root, from the list. Type a new user name if you want a user
name which is not on the list.
Password
Edit the password. Remember to repeat the password to be sure
you have specified it correctly.
You can only edit this if the selected user is a basic user.
Hardware type
Read-only field displaying the type of video device driver used for
communication with the hardware device.
Serial number (MAC
address)
Read-only field displaying the serial number of device. The serial
number is usually identical to the 12-character hexadecimal MAC
address of the hardware device (example: 0123456789AF).
License information
The current license status for the hardware.
Opens a wizard (see "About the Replace Hardware Device wizard"
on page 57) that you can use to replace the selected hardware
device with another one if you need to.
Replace Hardware Device
This can be relevant if you replace a physical camera on your
network. The wizard helps you take all relevant issues into
account including deciding what to do with recordings from
cameras attached to the old hardware device.
PTZ device (properties)
The PTZ device tab is only available if you configure (see "Configure hardware devices" on page
55) video encoder hardware devices on which you can use PTZ:
Connected cameras have
Pan-tilt-zoom capabilities
Select the check box if any of the cameras attached to the video
encoder device is a PTZ camera.
PTZ type on COM#
If a PTZ camera is controlled through a COM port, select the
relevant option. Options are device-specific, depending on which
PTZ protocols the device uses. Select None if you have no PTZ
cameras controlled through COM ports.
The table in the lower half of the dialog contains a row for each video channel on the hardware
device. First row from the top corresponds to video channel 1, second row from the top
corresponds to video channel 2 and so on.
Name
Advanced configuration
Name of the camera attached to the relevant video channel.
60
Network Video Management System Standard Edition 2016 R3 - Administrator Manual
Select whether the camera on the selected camera channel is
fixed or moveable:
Type
•
Fixed: Camera is a regular camera mounted in a fixed
position
•
Moveable: Camera is a PTZ camera
Port
Available only if Moveable is selected in the Type column. Select
which COM port on the video encoder to use for controlling the
PTZ camera.
Port Address
Available only if Moveable is selected in the Type column. Lets
you specify port address of the camera. The port address will
normally be 1. If using daisy chained PTZ cameras, the port
address will identify each of them, and you should verify your
settings with those recommended in the documentation for the
camera.
Cameras and storage information
About video and recording configuration
Once you have added hardware devices and attached cameras, you can configure video and
recording settings in three ways:
Name
Description
Wizard-driven
Guided configuration where you can specify video, recording and
archiving settings for all your cameras.
General
Specify video, recording and shared settings (such as dynamic
archiving paths and whether to record audio or not) for all your
cameras.
Camera-specific
Specify video, recording and camera-specific settings (such as
event notification, PTZ preset positions and fisheye view areas)
for each individual camera.
About database resizing
In case recordings for a camera get bigger than expected, or the available drive space is suddenly
reduced in another way, an advanced database resizing procedure automatically takes place:
•
If archives (see "About archiving" on page 116) are present on the same drive as the
camera's database, the oldest archive for all cameras archived on that drive is moved to
another drive (moving archives is only possible if you use dynamic archiving (see "Dynamic
path selection (properties)" on page 69), with which you can archive to several different
drives) or—if moving is not possible—deleted.
•
If no archives are present on the drive containing the camera's database, the size of all
camera databases on the drive is reduced by deleting a percentage of their oldest
recordings, temporarily limiting the size of all databases.
Advanced configuration
61
Network Video Management System Standard Edition 2016 R3 - Administrator Manual
When the Recording Server service (see "About services" on page 145) is restarted upon such
database resizing, the original database sizes are used. Therefore, you should make sure to solve
the drive size problem. Should the database resizing procedure take place, you are informed
on-screen in Network Video Management System Smart Client, in log files, and, if set up, through
notifications.
About motion detection
Motion detection settings are linked to the Recording properties settings for the camera under
which you can enable and configure motion detection for the selected camera. Motion detection
configuration is a key element in your system: your motion detection configuration determines
when the system generates motion events and typically also when video is recorded.
Motion detection is enabled as default. Disabling it improves the CPU and RAM performance of your
system, but can also affect your motion detection, event and alarm management.
Time spent on finding the best possible motion detection configuration for each camera helps you
avoid unnecessary recordings. Depending on the physical location of the camera, it may be a good
idea to test motion detection settings under different physical conditions such as day/night and
windy/calm weather.
Before you configure motion detection for a camera, Sony recommends that you have configured
the camera's image quality settings, for example resolution, video codec and stream settings. If
you later change image quality settings, you should always test any motion detection configuration
afterwards.
In the following two tables, you can see the differences between enabling (table 1) and disabling
(table 2) built-in motion detection for a camera.
Enabled motion detection
Recording
properties setting
Recordings
Motion-based
events
Non-motion
Sequences
based events
Always
Yes
Yes
Yes
Yes
Never
No
Yes
Yes
No
Built-in Motion
Detection
Yes
Yes
Yes
Yes
Built-in Motion
Detection & Event or
Event only
Yes
Yes
Yes
Yes
Camera's recording
Recordings
settings
Motion-based
events
Non-motion
Sequences
based events
Always
Yes
No
Yes
No
Never
No
No
Yes
No
Built-in Motion
Detection
No
No
Yes
No
Disabled motion detection
Advanced configuration
62
Network Video Management System Standard Edition 2016 R3 - Administrator Manual
Camera's recording
Recordings
settings
Motion-based
events
Non-motion
Sequences
based events
Built-in Motion
Detection and Event
or Event only
No
Yes (depending
on settings)
Yes (depending
on settings)
No
Motion detection sensitivity
Motion detection is per default set up for dynamic sensitivity. However, you can also adjust the
sensitivity level manually under Motion Detection properties.
Sony recommends that you do not enable manual sensitivity because:
•
With dynamic sensitivity, the system calculates and optimizes the sensitivity level
automatically and suppresses the motion detections that come from noise in the images.
•
Dynamic sensitivity improves motion detection at nighttime, where the noise in the images
often triggers false motion.
•
The system is not overloaded from too much recording.
•
The users are not missing results from too little recording.
Motion detection and PTZ cameras
Motion detection generally works the same way for pan-tilt-zoom (PTZ) cameras as it does for
regular cameras. However, you cannot configure motion detection separately for each of a PTZ
camera's preset positions.
About motion detection and PTZ cameras
Motion detection generally works the same way for pan-tilt-zoom (PTZ) cameras as it does for
regular cameras. However, you cannot configure motion detection separately for each of a PTZ
camera's preset positions.
In order to activate unwanted recordings, notifications and more, the system automatically disables
motion detection while a PTZ camera moves between two preset positions. After a number of
seconds has passed, the system automatically enables motion detection again. This period of time
is known as the transition time and is specified on the PTZ camera's PTZ patrolling properties (see
"PTZ patrolling (properties)" on page 94).
Configure camera-specific schedules
If you base your schedule profile, or parts of it, on events within periods of time: remember to
select Start event and Stop event from the lists below the calendar section.
Advanced configuration
63
Network Video Management System Standard Edition 2016 R3 - Administrator Manual
Use the Configure events list located below the other fields to define events that suit your needs.
The fact that a camera transfers video to your system does not necessarily mean that video from
the camera is recorded. Recording is configured separately, see Configure video and recording (see
"About video and recording configuration" on page 61).
For each camera, you can create schedule profiles based on:
Online periods
•
Periods of time (example: Mondays from 08.30 until 17.45), shown in pink:
•
Events within periods of time (example: from Event A occurs until Event B occurs Mondays
from 08.30 until 17.45), shown in yellow:
The two options can be combined
, but they cannot overlap in time.
Speedup
•
Periods of time (example: Mondays from 08.30 until 17.45), shown in olive green:
E-mail notification
•
Periods of time (example: Mondays from 08.30 until 17.45), shown in blue:
PTZ patrolling
•
Periods of time (example: Mondays from 08.30 until 17.45), shown in red:
•
If use of one patrolling profile is followed immediately by use of another, run your mouse
pointer over the red bar to see which patrolling profile applies when.
SMS notification
•
Periods of time (example: Mondays from 08.30 until 17.45), shown in green:
Advanced configuration
64
Network Video Management System Standard Edition 2016 R3 - Administrator Manual
Set up a profile
1. In the Schedule Profiles list, select Add new....
2. In the Add Profile dialog, enter a name for the profile. Names must not contain any of
these special characters: < > & ' " \ / : * ? | [ ]
3. In the top right corner of the dialog, select Set camera to start/stop on time to base
subsequent settings on periods of time or Set camera to start/stop on event to base
subsequent settings on events within periods of time.
4. In the calendar section, place your mouse pointer at a required start point, then hold down
the left mouse button, drag the mouse pointer and release at the required end point.
•
You specify each day separately.
•
You specify time in increments of five minutes. The system helps you by showing
the time over which your mouse pointer is positioned.
If you base your schedule profile, or parts of it, on events within periods of time: remember to
select Start event and Stop event from the lists below the calendar section.
•
Use the Configure events list located below the other fields to define events that
suit your needs.
•
To delete an unwanted part of a schedule profile, right-click it and select Delete.
•
To quickly fill or clear an entire day, double-click the name of the day.
•
As an alternative to dragging inside the calendar section, use the Start time, End
time and Day fields, then the Change Period or Set Period button as required.
When using the Start time and End time fields, remember that time is specified in
increments of five minutes. You cannot specify a period shorter than five minutes,
and you can only use times like 12:00, 12.05, 12:10, 12:15, etc. If you specify a
time outside of the five-minute intervals, such as 12:13, you will get an error
message.
Configure when cameras should do what
Use the scheduling feature to configure when:
•
Cameras should be online and transfer video to your system.
•
Cameras should use speedup to use a higher than normal frame rate
•
You want to receive email and/or SMS notifications regarding cameras
•
PTZ cameras should patrol, and according to which patrolling profile
•
Archiving should take place
See Configure general scheduling and archiving (on page 121) and Configure camera-specific
schedules (on page 63).
Advanced configuration
65
Network Video Management System Standard Edition 2016 R3 - Administrator Manual
Configure motion detection
To configure motion detection, do the following:
1. Expand Advanced Configuration > Cameras and Storage Information, right-click the
relevant camera > Properties.
2. In the Camera Properties window, select the Recording Properties tab > select the
relevant settings (see "About motion detection" on page 62).
3. Select the Motion Detection tab. If there are any areas to exclude from motion detection
(for example, if the camera covers an area where a tree is swaying in the wind), you can
exclude that area (see "Adjust motion detection: Exclude regions" on page 50) by selecting
it with your mouse.
4. Fill in the relevant properties (see "Motion detection & exclude regions" on page 90). Note
that there are some differences in motion-detection behavior for PTZ cameras (see "About
motion detection and PTZ cameras" on page 63).
Disable or delete cameras
All cameras are enabled by default. This means that video from the cameras can be transferred to
your system if the cameras are scheduled to be online (see "Online period" on page 124).
To disable a camera:
1. Expand Advanced Configuration, expand Cameras and Storage Information,
double-click the camera you want to disable, and clear the Enabled box.
2. Save your configuration changes by clicking Save in the yellow notification bar in the
upper-right corner of the Management Application.
To delete a camera, you have to delete the hardware device (see "Delete/disable hardware
devices" on page 56). If you delete the hardware device, you also delete any attached microphones
or speakers. If you do not want this, consider disabling the camera instead.
Move PTZ type 1 and 3 to required positions
For PTZ types 1 and 3, you can move the PTZ camera to required positions in several different
ways:
1. Click the required position in the camera preview (if supported by the camera).
2. Use the sliders located near the camera preview to move the PTZ camera along each of its
axes: the X-axis (for panning left/right), the Y-axis (for tilting up/down), and the Z-axis
(for zooming in and out; to zoom in, move the slider towards Tele; to zoom out, move the
slider towards Wide).
Advanced configuration
66
Network Video Management System Standard Edition 2016 R3 - Administrator Manual
3. Use the navigation buttons:
Moves the PTZ camera up and to the left
Moves the PTZ camera up
Moves the PTZ camera up and to the right
Moves the PTZ camera to the left
Moves the PTZ camera to its home position (that is
default position)
Moves the PTZ camera to the right
Moves the PTZ camera down and to the left
Moves the PTZ camera down
Moves the PTZ camera down and to the right
Zooms out (one zoom level per click)
Zooms in (one zoom level per click)
Recording and storage properties
Recording and archiving paths (properties)
When you configure video and recording (see "About video and recording configuration" on page
61), you can specify certain properties for many cameras in one go. Either in order to speed up
things, or because the relevant properties are shared by all cameras rather than being specific to
individual cameras.
You can edit all properties on a white background. You cannot edit properties on a light blue
background. Note that all of the properties can also be specified individually for each camera.
The template can help you configure similar properties quickly.
Template
Say you have 20 cameras and you want to change the recording
path, archiving path, and retention time for all of them. Instead
of having to enter the same three pieces of information 20 times,
you can simply enter them once in the template, and then apply
the template to the 20 cameras with only two clicks.
Apply Template
Select which cameras you want to apply the template for. Use
one of the two Set buttons to actually apply the template.
Camera Name
The name as it appears in the Management Application as well as
in clients. You can overwrite the existing name with a new one.
Names must be unique, and must not contain any of these special
characters: < > & ' " \ / : * ? | [ ]
Advanced configuration
67
Network Video Management System Standard Edition 2016 R3 - Administrator Manual
Users of Network Video Management System Smart Client can
take advantage of keyboard shortcuts, some of which let the
users toggle between viewing different cameras. Such shortcuts
include numbers which are used to identify each camera.
Shortcut
Shortcut numbers must be unique for each camera. A camera
shortcut number must not contain any letters or special
characters, and must not be longer than eight digits.
Examples of correct camera shortcut numbers: 3, 12345678.
Examples of incorrect camera shortcut numbers: Cam#3,
123456789.
More information about using the keyboard shortcuts is available
in the separate documentation for Network Video Management
System Smart Client.
Path to the folder in which the camera's database should be
stored. Default is C:\MediaDatabase. To browse for another
folder, click the browse icon next to the required cell. You can
only specify a path to a folder on a local drive. You cannot
specify a path to a network drive. If you use a network drive, you
cannot save recordings if the network drive becomes unavailable.
Recording Path
If you change the recording path, and you have existing
recordings at the old location, you are asked whether you want to
move the recordings to the new location, leave them at the old
location, or delete them.
If you have several cameras, and several local drives are
available, you can improve performance by distributing individual
cameras' databases across several drives.
Only editable if not using dynamic paths for archiving (see "About
archiving" on page 116). Path to the folder in which the camera's
archived recordings should be stored. Default is
C:\MediaDatabase.
Archiving Path
To browse for another folder, click the browse icon next to the
relevant cell. If you change the archiving path, and there are
existing archived recordings at the old location, you are asked
whether you want to move the archived recordings to the new
location (recommended), leave them at the old location, or delete
them. Note that if you move archived recordings, your system
also archives what is currently in the camera database. In case
you wonder why the camera database is empty just after you
have moved archived recordings, this is the reason.
Total amount of time for which you want to keep recordings from
the camera (that is, recordings in the camera's database as well
as any archived recordings). The default retention time is 7 days.
Retention time
Retention time covers the total amount of time you want to keep
recordings for. In earlier versions of your surveillance system,
you specified time limits separately for the database and
archives.
Camera
Click the Open button to configure detailed and/or
camera-specific settings (such as event notification, PTZ preset
positions, and fisheye view areas) for the selected camera.
Select All
Click button to select all cameras in the Apply Template column.
Advanced configuration
68
Network Video Management System Standard Edition 2016 R3 - Administrator Manual
Clear All
Click button to clear all selections in the Apply Template
column.
Set selected template value
on selected cameras
Apply only a selected value from the template to selected
cameras.
Set all template values on
selected cameras
Apply all values from the template to selected cameras.
Dynamic path selection (properties)
When you configure video and recording (see "About video and recording configuration" on page
61), you can specify certain properties for many cameras in one go. In the case of dynamic path
selection, all cameras share the properties.
With dynamic archiving (see "About archiving" on page 116) paths, you specify a number of
different archiving paths, usually across several drives. If the path containing the system database
is on one of the drives you have selected for archiving, the system always tries to archive to that
drive first. If not, the system automatically archives to the archiving drive with the most available
space at any time, provided there is not a camera database using that drive. Which drive has the
most available space may change during the archiving process, and archiving may therefore
happen to several archiving drives during the same process. This fact has no impact on how users
find and view archived recordings.
Dynamic archiving paths are general for all your cameras. You cannot configure dynamic archiving
paths for individual cameras.
Enable dynamic path
selection archives
Enables the use of dynamic path selection, allowing you to select
which paths you want to use. The list of selectable paths initially
represents all drives on the server, both local and mapped drives.
You can add further paths with the New path feature below the
list.
Use
Select particular paths for use as dynamic archiving paths. You
can also select a previously manually added path for removal (see
description of Remove button in the following).
Drive
For example the C:\ drive.
Path
Path to where you save the files, for example C:\ or
\\OurServer\OurFolder\OurSubfolder\.
Drive Size
The total size of the drive.
Free Space
Amount of unused space left on the drive.
New path
Specify a new path, and add it to the list using the Add button.
Paths must be reachable by the surveillance system server, and
you must specify the path using the Universal Naming Convention
(UNC) format, example: \\server\volume\directory\. When the
new path is added, you can select it for use as a dynamic
archiving path.
Add
Add the path specified in the New path field to the list.
Remove
Remove a selected path that you have added manually from the
list. You cannot remove any of the initially listed paths, not even
when they are selected.
Advanced configuration
69
Network Video Management System Standard Edition 2016 R3 - Administrator Manual
Video recording (properties)
When you configure video and recording (see "About video and recording configuration" on page
61), you can specify certain properties for many cameras in one go. Either in order to speed up
things, or because the relevant properties are shared by all cameras rather than being specific to
individual cameras.
The term recording means saving video and, if applicable, audio from a camera in the camera's
database on the surveillance system server. Video/audio is often saved only when there is a reason
to do so, for example as long as motion is detected, when an event occurs and until another event
occurs, or within a certain period of time.
You can edit all properties on a white background. You cannot edit properties on a light blue
background.
Note that you can also specify all of the Video Recording properties individually for each camera
(see "Recording" on page 85).
Name
Description
Template
The template can help you configure similar properties quickly.
Say you have 20 cameras and you want to change the recording
path, archiving path, and retention time for all of them. Instead
of having to enter the same three pieces of information 20 times,
you can simply enter them once in the template, and then apply
the template to the 20 cameras with only two clicks.
Apply Template
Select which cameras you want to apply the template for. Use
one of the two Set buttons to actually apply the template.
Camera Name
The name as it appears in the Management Application as well as
in clients. You can overwrite the existing name with a new one.
Names must be unique, and must not contain any of these special
characters: < > & ' " \ / : * ? | [ ]
Advanced configuration
70
Network Video Management System Standard Edition 2016 R3 - Administrator Manual
Name
Description
Select under which conditions video from the camera should be
recorded:
•
Always: Record whenever the camera is enabled and
scheduled to be online. The latter option allows for
time-based recording.
•
Never: Never record. Live video is shown, but users cannot
play back video from the camera because no video is kept in
the database.
•
Motion Detection: Select this to record video when motion
is detected. Unless you add post-recording, recording stops
immediately after the last motion is detected.
•
Event: Select this to record video when an event occurs and
until another event occurs. Use of recording on event requires
that events (see "Overview of events and output" on page
100) have been defined, and that you select start and stop
events. Use the Configure events list located below the other
fields to define events that suit your needs.
•
Motion Detection and Event: Select this to record video in
which motion is detected, or when an event occurs and until
another event occurs. Remember to select start and stop
events in the neighboring columns.
Record on
Start Event
Select the relevant start event. Recording will begin when the
start event occurs (or earlier if using pre-recording; see the
following).
Stop Event
Select the relevant stop event. Recording will end when the stop
event occurs (or later if using post-recording; see the following).
Pre-recording
You can store recordings from periods preceding detected motion
and/or start events. Select check box to enable this feature.
Specify the required number of seconds in the neighboring
column.
Seconds [of pre-recording]
Specify the number of seconds for which you want to record video
from before recording start conditions (that is motion or start
event) are met. Usually, only some seconds of pre-recording is
required, but you can specify up to 65535 seconds of
pre-recording, corresponding to 18 hours, 12 minutes and 15
seconds. However, if specifying a very long pre-recording time,
you can potentially run into a scenario where your pre-recording
time spans scheduled or unscheduled archiving (see "About
archiving" on page 116) times. That can be problematic since
pre-recording does not work well during archiving.
Post-recording
You can store recordings from periods following detected motion
and/or stop events. Select the check box to enable this feature.
Specify the required number of seconds in the neighboring
column.
Advanced configuration
71
Network Video Management System Standard Edition 2016 R3 - Administrator Manual
Name
Description
Seconds [of post-recording]
Specify the number of seconds for which you want to record video
from after recording stop conditions (that is motion or stop event)
are met. Usually, only some seconds of post-recording is
required, but you can specify up to 65535 seconds of
post-recording, corresponding to 18 hours, 12 minutes and 15
seconds.
If you specify a very long post-recording time, you can potentially
run into a scenario where your post-recording time spans
scheduled or unscheduled archiving times. That can be
problematic since post-recording does not work well during
archiving.
Camera
Click the Open button to configure detailed and/or
camera-specific settings (such as event notification, PTZ preset
positions, and fisheye view areas) for the selected camera.
Select All
Click the button to select all cameras in the Apply Template
column.
Clear All
Click the button to clear all selections in the Apply Template
column.
Set selected template value
on selected cameras
Apply only a selected value from the template to selected
cameras.
Set all template values on
selected cameras
Apply all values from the template to selected cameras.
If the camera uses the MJPEG video format
With MJPEG, you can define frame rates for regular as well as speedup modes. If the camera offers
dual stream, you can also enable this.
Note that there are three places where you can set frame rate:
•
Live Frame Rate - used for the regular recording stream
•
Live Frame Rate - used when speeding up recordings in connection with motion detection
or similar functionality.
•
FPS (Frames per second) - used for the additional stream used for live viewing.
Regular frame rate mode:
Frame Rate
Live Frame Rate
Advanced configuration
Required average frame rate for video from the camera. Select
the number of frames, then select the time unit interval (second,
minute or hour).
Required average frame rate for live video from the camera.
Select the number of frames, then select the time unit interval
(second, minute or hour).
If the camera supports dual stream and dual stream is enabled,
the Live Frame Rate column will be read-only with the value Dual
streaming—which cannot be altered.
72
Network Video Management System Standard Edition 2016 R3 - Administrator Manual
Recording Frame Rate
Required average frame rate for recorded video from the camera.
Select the number of frames, then select the time unit interval
(second, minute or hour). The frame rate must be higher than
the frame rate specified under normal mode.
Speedup frame rate mode:
Enable speedup frame rate
The speedup feature lets you use a higher than normal frame rate
if motion is detected and/or an event occurs. When you enable
speedup, further columns for specifying speedup details become
available.
Frame Rate
Speedup frame rate for viewing video from the camera. Select
the number of frames, then select the time unit interval (second,
minute or hour). The frame rate must be higher than the frame
rate specified under normal mode.
On motion
Select this check box to use the speedup frame rates when
motion is detected. The camera will return to the normal frame
rates two seconds after the last motion is detected.
On event
Select this check box to use the speedup frame rates when an
event occurs and until another event occurs. Use of speedup on
event requires that events have been defined, and that you select
start and stop events in the neighboring lists.
Use the Configure events list located below the other fields to
define events that suit your needs.
Start Event
Select required start event. The camera will begin using the
speedup frame rates when the start event occurs.
Stop Event
Select required stop event. The camera will return to the normal
frame rates when the stop event occurs.
Live Frame Rate
Required average frame rate for live video from the camera.
Select the number of frames, then select the time unit interval
(second, minute or hour). The frame rate must be higher than
the frame rate specified under normal mode.
If the camera supports dual stream and dual stream is enabled,
the Live Frame Rate column will be read-only with the value Dual
streaming—which cannot be altered.
Recording Frame Rate
Required average frame rate for recorded video from the camera.
Select the number of frames, then select the time unit interval
(second, minute or hour). The frame rate must be higher than
the frame rate specified under normal mode.
You do not have to base speedup on motion or events. You can also use scheduling (see "Speedup"
on page 125) to configure speedup based on particular periods of time. If you prefer time-based
speedup, you should still enable the use of speedup by selecting the Enable speedup check box.
Advanced configuration
73
Network Video Management System Standard Edition 2016 R3 - Administrator Manual
Dual stream:
Enable dedicated live
stream
This additional stream feature lets you use the alternative stream
of the camera. It enables two independent streams to the
recording server—a stream for live viewing and another stream
for recording purposes, with different resolution, encoding, and
frame rate.
Stream
Select the type of the live stream. Stream settings for viewing
live video and for recording video may very well be different in
order to get the best result.
Resolution
Select the camera's resolution.
FPS
Select the camera's live frame rate per second (FPS)
Important: This feature is only available on cameras supporting dual stream.
If the camera uses the MPEG video format
With MPEG, you can define frame rate and other settings:
Frame rate per second
Frame rate for viewing live and recorded video from the camera.
Select number of frames per second.
Record keyframes only
Keyframes stored at specified intervals record the entire view of
the camera, whereas the following frames record only pixels that
change. This helps greatly reducing the size of MPEG files. Select
the check box if you only want to record keyframes. Note that
you can specify exceptions if motion is detected or events occur.
Record all frames on event
Allows you to make exceptions if you have selected to record
keyframes only. Select this check box to record all frames when
an event occurs and until another event occurs. Use of this
feature requires that events have been defined, and that you
select start and stop events in the neighboring lists.
Use the Configure events list located below the other fields to
define events that suit your needs.
Start Event
Use when recording on Event or Motion Detection and
Event. Select the relevant start event. The camera begins
recording all frames when the start event occurs.
Stop Event
Select the relevant stop event. The camera stops recording
keyframes when the stop event occurs.
Dual stream:
Enable dedicated live
stream
Advanced configuration
This additional stream feature lets you use the alternative stream
of the camera. It enables two independent streams to the
recording server—a stream for live viewing and another stream
for recording purposes, with different resolution, encoding, and
frame rate.
74
Network Video Management System Standard Edition 2016 R3 - Administrator Manual
Stream
Select the type of the live stream. Stream settings for viewing
live video and for recording video may very well be different in
order to get the best result.
Resolution
Select the camera's resolution.
FPS
Select the camera's live frame rate per second (FPS)
Important: This feature is only available on cameras supporting dual stream.
Manual recording
When you configure video and recording (see "About video and recording configuration" on page
61), you can specify certain properties for many cameras in one go. In the case of manual
recording, it is because the properties are shared by all cameras.
When manual recording is enabled, Network Video Management System Smart Client users with
the necessary rights can manually start recording if they see something of interest while viewing
live video from a camera which is not already recording. User-driven recording always takes place
for a fixed time, for example for five minutes.
Enable manual recording
Select check box to enable manual recording and specify further
details.
Default duration of manual
recording
Period of time in seconds during which user-driven recording take
place. Default duration is 300 seconds, corresponding to five
minutes.
The maximum allowed period of time for user-driven recording.
This maximum is not relevant in connection with manual
recording started from Network Video Management System Smart
Client, since such manual recording always takes place for a fixed
time.
Maximum duration of
manual recording
In some installations, you can also combine manual recording
with third-party applications if integrating these with the system
through an API or similar, and in such cases specifying a
maximum duration may be relevant.
If you are using manual recording in connection with Network
Video Management System Smart Client only, disregard this
property.
If manual recording is enabled, this can take place even if recording for individual cameras (see
"Recording" on page 85) is set to Never or Conditionally.
Frame rate - MJPEG
When you configure video and recording (see "About video and recording configuration" on page
61), you can specify certain properties for many cameras in one go. Either in order to speed up
things, or because the relevant properties are shared by all cameras rather than being specific to
individual cameras.
Advanced configuration
75
Network Video Management System Standard Edition 2016 R3 - Administrator Manual
You can edit all properties on a white background. You cannot edit properties on a light blue
background. Note that all of the Frame rate - MJPEG properties can also be specified individually
for each camera (see "Recording" on page 85) using MJPEG.
Template and common properties
Name
Description
Template
The template can help you configure similar properties quickly.
Say you have 20 cameras and you want to change the recording
path, archiving path, and retention time for all of them. Instead
of having to enter the same three pieces of information 20 times,
you can simply enter them once in the template, and then apply
the template to the 20 cameras with only two clicks.
Apply Template
Select which cameras you want to apply the template for. Use
one of the two Set buttons to actually apply the template.
Select All
Click the button to select all cameras in the Apply Template
column.
Clear All
Click the button to clear all selections in the Apply Template
column.
Set selected template value
on selected cameras
Apply only a selected value from the template to selected
cameras.
Set all template values on
selected cameras
Apply all values from the template to selected cameras.
Camera Name
The name as it appears in the Management Application as well as
in clients. You can overwrite the existing name with a new one.
Names must be unique, and must not contain any of these special
characters: < > & ' " \ / : * ? | [ ]
Regular frame rate properties
Specify the following frame rate properties:
Name
Description
Frame Rate
Required average frame rate for video from the camera. Select
the number of frames, then select the time unit interval (second,
minute or hour).
Time Unit
Select required unit for live and recording frame rates (per
second, minute, or hour). Note that you can only select time
bases that let you speed up frame rates. Example: If you have
specified 15 frames per second in normal mode, you cannot
specify 16 frames per minute or hour in speedup mode.
Camera
Click the Open button to configure detailed and/or
camera-specific settings (such as event notification, PTZ preset
positions, and fisheye view areas) for the selected camera.
Advanced configuration
76
Network Video Management System Standard Edition 2016 R3 - Administrator Manual
Name
Live Frame Rate
Recording Frame Rate
Description
The required average frame rate for live video from the camera.
Select the number of frames, then select the time unit interval
(second, minute or hour).
If the camera supports dual stream and you have enabled dual
stream, the Live Frame Rate column is read-only with the value
Dual streaming. You cannot change this.
Required average frame rate for recorded video from the camera.
Select the number of frames, then select the time unit interval
(second, minute or hour). The frame rate must be higher than
the frame rate specified under normal mode.
Speedup frame rate properties
Name
Description
Enable Speedup
The speedup feature lets you use a higher than normal frame rate
if motion is detected and/or an event occurs. When you enable
speedup, further columns for specifying speedup details become
available.
Frame Rate
Speedup frame rate for viewing video from the camera. Select
the number of frames, then select the time unit interval (second,
minute or hour). The frame rate must be higher than the frame
rate specified under normal mode.
Select the required unit for live and recording frame rates (per
second, minute, or hour).
Time Unit
Note that you can only select time bases that let you speed up
frame rates.
Example: If you have specified 15 frames per second in normal
mode, you cannot specify 16 frames per minute or hour in
speedup mode.
•
Motion Detection: Select this option to speed up when the
system detects motion (see "Motion detection & exclude
regions" on page 90). The system goes back to using normal
frame rates once it has detected the last motion.
•
Event: Select this option to speed up when an event occurs
and until another event occurs. You can only use speedup on
event if you have defined events, and if you have selected
start and stop events in the neighboring columns.
Use the Configure events list located below the other fields to
define events that suit your needs.
•
Motion Detection & Event: Select this option to speed up
when the system detects motion, or when an event occurs
and until another event occurs. Remember to select start and
stop events in the neighboring columns.
Speedup On
Schedule Only
Advanced configuration
Select this option to speed up according to the camera's speedup
schedule (see "Speedup" on page 125) only.
77
Network Video Management System Standard Edition 2016 R3 - Administrator Manual
Name
Description
Start Event
Select the relevant start event. The camera begins to use the
speedup frame rates when the start event occurs.
Stop event
Select the relevant start event. The camera returns to the normal
frame rates when the stop event occurs.
Camera
Click the Open button to configure detailed and/or
camera-specific settings (such as event notification, PTZ preset
positions, and fisheye view areas) for the selected camera.
Live Frame Rate
The required average frame rate for live video from the camera.
Select the number of frames, then select the time unit interval
(second, minute or hour). The frame rate must be higher than
the frame rate specified under normal mode.
If the camera supports dual stream and you have enabled dual
stream, the Live Frame Rate column is read-only with the value
Dual streaming. You cannot change this.
Recording Frame Rate
The required average frame rate for recorded video from the
camera. Select the number of frames, then select the time unit
interval (second, minute or hour).
Frame Rate - MPEG
When you configure video and recording (see "About video and recording configuration" on page
61), you can specify certain properties for many cameras in one go. Either in order to speed up
things, or because the relevant properties are shared by all cameras rather than being specific to
individual cameras.
You can also specify all of the Frame Rate H.264/MPEG4 properties individually for each camera
(see "Recording" on page 85) using H.264/MPEG4.
Template
The template can help you configure similar properties quickly.
Say you have 20 cameras and you want to change the recording
path, archiving path, and retention time for all of them. Instead
of having to enter the same three pieces of information 20 times,
you can simply enter them once in the template, and then apply
the template to the 20 cameras with only two clicks.
Apply Template
Select which cameras you want to apply the template for. Use
one of the two Set buttons to actually apply the template.
Camera Name
The name as it appears in the Management Application as well as
in clients. You can overwrite the existing name with a new one.
Names must be unique, and must not contain any of these special
characters: < > & ' " \ / : * ? | [ ]
Dual Stream
Allows you to check if dual streaming is enabled on the
camera(s). Note that the information is read-only. For cameras
that support dual streaming, this can be enabled/disabled as part
of individual cameras' Video (on page 82) properties.
Live FPS
Select the camera's live frame rate per second (FPS).
Advanced configuration
78
Network Video Management System Standard Edition 2016 R3 - Administrator Manual
Camera
Click the Open button to configure detailed and/or
camera-specific settings (such as event notification, PTZ preset
positions, and fisheye view areas) for the selected camera.
Select All
Click the button to select all cameras in the Apply Template
column.
Clear All
Click button to clear all selections in the Apply Template
column.
Set selected template value
on selected cameras
Apply only a selected value from the template to selected
cameras.
Set all template values on
selected cameras
Apply all values from the template to selected cameras.
Record Keyframe Only
Keyframes stored at specified intervals record the entire view of
the camera, whereas the following frames record only pixels that
change; this helps greatly reduce the size of MPEG files. Select
the check box if you only want to record keyframes.
Allows you to make exceptions if you have selected to record
keyframes only.
•
Motion Detection: Select this to record all frames when
motion is detected. Two seconds after the last motion (see
"Motion detection & exclude regions" on page 90) is detected,
the camera will return to recording keyframes only.
•
Event: Select this to record all frames when an event occurs
and until another event occurs. Requires that events (see
"Overview of events and output" on page 100) have been
defined, and that you select start and stop events in the
neighboring columns.
Record All Frames on
Use the Configure events list located below the other fields to
define events that suit your needs.
•
Motion Detection and Event: Select this to record all
frames when motion is detected, or when an event occurs and
until another event occurs. Remember to select start and stop
events in the neighboring columns.
•
Schedule only: Select this to record all frames according to
the camera's speedup schedule (see "Speedup" on page 125)
only.
Start Event
Use when recording on Event or Motion Detection and
Event. Select the relevant start event. The camera begins
recording all frames when the start event occurs.
Stop Event
Select the relevant stop event. The camera only stops recording
keyframes when the stop event occurs.
Audio recording
When you configure video and recording (see "About video and recording configuration" on page
61) for specific cameras, you can decide whether to record audio or not. Your choice applies for all
cameras on your system.
Advanced configuration
79
Network Video Management System Standard Edition 2016 R3 - Administrator Manual
Always
Always record audio on all applicable cameras.
Never
Never record audio on any cameras. Note that even though audio
is never recorded, you can still listen to live audio in Network
Video Management System Smart Client.
Audio recording and video storage capacity
If you record audio, it is important that you note that audio recording affects video storage
capacity.
Audio is recorded to the associated camera’s database. The result is that the database is likely to
become full earlier if you record audio and video than if you only record video. The fact that the
database becomes full is not in itself a problem since your system automatically archives (see
"About archiving" on page 116) data if the database becomes full. However, you may need
additional archiving space if you record audio.
•
Example: If you use MPEG4, each one-second video GOP (Group Of Pictures) are
stored in one record in the database. Each second of audio is also stored in one
record in the database. This reduces the database’s video storage capacity to half
its capacity, because half of the database’s records is used for storing audio.
Consequently, the database runs full sooner, and automatic archiving takes place
more often than if you were only recording video.
•
Example: If you use MJPEG, audio is stored in one record for every JPEG for as long
as the audio block size does not exceed the time between the JPEGs. In extreme
cases, this reduces the database’s video storage capacity to half its capacity,
because half of the database’s records is used for storing audio. If you use very
high frame rates, which means less time between each JPEG, a smaller portion of
the database is used for storing audio records, and consequently a larger portion is
available for storing video. The result is that the database runs full sooner, and
automatic archiving takes place more often than if you were only recording video.
Above examples are simplified. The exact available video storage capacity also depends on
GOP/JPEG and audio kilobyte size.
Audio selection (properties)
When you configure video and recording (see "About video and recording configuration" on page
61), you can specify certain properties for many cameras in one go. Either in order to speed up
things, or because the relevant properties are shared by all cameras rather than being specific to
individual cameras. With a default microphone or speaker selected for a camera, audio from the
microphone or speaker is automatically in use when you view video from the camera. Note that all
of the properties can also be specified individually for each camera.
Template
The template can help you configure similar properties quickly.
Say you have 20 cameras and you want to change the recording
path, archiving path, and retention time for all of them. Instead
of having to enter the same three pieces of information 20 times,
you can simply enter them once in the template, and then apply
the template to the 20 cameras with only two clicks.
Apply Template
Select which cameras you want to apply the template for. Use
one of the two Set buttons to actually apply the template.
Advanced configuration
80
Network Video Management System Standard Edition 2016 R3 - Administrator Manual
Camera Name
The name as it appears in the Management Application as well as
in clients. You can overwrite the existing name with a new one.
Names must be unique, and must not contain any of these special
characters: < > & ' " \ / : * ? | [ ]
Default Microphone
Select a default microphone.
Camera
Click the Open button to configure detailed and/or
camera-specific settings (such as event notification, PTZ preset
positions, and fisheye view areas) for the selected camera.
Select All
Click button to select all cameras in the Apply Template column.
Clear All
Click button to clear all selections in the Apply Template
column.
Set selected template value
on selected cameras
Apply only a selected value from the template to selected
cameras.
Set all template values on
selected cameras
Apply all values from the template to selected cameras.
Default Speaker
Select a default speaker.
Storage information
The storage information properties show how much storage space you have on your system and
how much of it is free. To quickly view disk space usage in a pie chart format, select the line
representing the drive you are interested in.
Name
Description
Drive
Letter representing the drive in question, for example C:.
Path
Path to where you save the files, for example C:\ or
\\OurServer\OurFolder\OurSubfolder\.
Usage
What the storage area is used for, for example recording or
archiving.
Drive Size
Total size of the drive.
Video Data
Amount of video data on the drive.
Other Data
Amount of other data on the drive.
Free Space
Amount of unused space left on the drive.
Camera properties
General
When you configure video and recording (see "About video and recording configuration" on page
61) for specific cameras, properties include:
Advanced configuration
81
Network Video Management System Standard Edition 2016 R3 - Administrator Manual
Enabled
Cameras are by default enabled, meaning that provided they are
scheduled to be online (see "Online period" on page 124) and
that they can to transfer video to your system. You can disable an
individual camera, in which case no video/audio is transferred
from the camera source to your system.
Preview
Select this check box to show a preview of your camera's video.
If you clear the check box, your system does not show a preview
for your camera.
Camera Name
The name as it appears in the Management Application as well as
in clients. You can overwrite the existing name with a new one.
Names must be unique, and must not contain any of these special
characters: < > & ' " \ / : * ? | [ ]
Users of Network Video Management System Smart Client can
take advantage of keyboard shortcuts, some of which let the
users toggle between viewing different cameras. Such shortcuts
include numbers which are used to identify each camera.
Camera shortcut number
Shortcut numbers must be unique for each camera. A camera
shortcut number must not contain any letters or special
characters, and must not be longer than eight digits. Examples of
correct camera shortcut numbers: 3, 12345678. Examples of
incorrect camera shortcut numbers: Cam#3, 123456789.
More information about using the keyboard shortcuts is available
in the separate documentation for Network Video Management
System Smart Client.
These properties are to a large extent camera-specific. Since such properties vary from camera to
camera, descriptions in the following are for guidance only. If you can access the selected camera,
a live preview is displayed. Click the Camera Settings... button to open a separate window with
properties for the selected camera.
The video properties typically let you control bandwidth, brightness, compression, contrast,
resolution, rotation, and more by overwriting existing values of selecting new ones. When you
adjust video settings, you can—for most cameras—preview the effect of your settings in an image
below the fields.
Video settings may feature an Include Date and Time setting. If set to Yes, date and time from
the camera are included in video. Note, however, that cameras are separate units which may have
separate timing devices, power supplies, etc. Camera time and system time may therefore not
correspond fully, and this may occasionally lead to confusion. As all frames are time-stamped by
your system upon reception, and exact date and time information for each image is already known,
it is recommended that the setting is set to No.
For consistent time synchronization, you may—if supported by the camera—automatically
synchronize camera and system time through a time server.
Video
When you configure video and recording (see "About video and recording configuration" on page
61) for specific cameras, you can use either the MJPEG video format or the MPEG video format.
Depending on which of the two options you choose, you can set different options for your camera.
Advanced configuration
82
Network Video Management System Standard Edition 2016 R3 - Administrator Manual
MJPEG video format
With MJPEG, you can define frame rates for regular as well as speedup modes. If the camera offers
dual stream, you can also enable this. Note that there are three places where you can set frame
rate:
•
Live Frame Rate - used for the regular recording stream
•
Live Frame Rate - used when speeding up recordings in connection with motion detection
or similar functionality.
•
FPS (frames per second) - used for the additional stream used for live viewing.
Regular frame rate mode
Frame Rate
Live Frame Rate
Recording Frame Rate
Required average frame rate for video from the camera. Select
the number of frames, then select the time unit interval (second,
minute or hour).
The required average frame rate for live video from the camera.
Select the number of frames, then select the time unit interval
(second, minute or hour).
If the camera supports dual stream and you have enabled dual
stream, the Live Frame Rate column is read-only with the value
Dual streaming. You cannot change this.
Required average frame rate for recorded video from the camera.
Select the number of frames, then select the time unit interval
(second, minute or hour). The frame rate must be higher than
the frame rate specified under normal mode.
Speedup frame rate mode
Enable speedup frame rate
The speedup feature lets you use a higher than normal frame rate
if motion is detected and/or an event occurs. When you enable
speedup, further columns for specifying speedup details become
available.
Frame Rate
Speedup frame rate for viewing video from the camera. Select
the number of frames, then select the time unit interval (second,
minute or hour). The frame rate must be higher than the frame
rate specified under normal mode.
On motion
Select this check box to use the speedup frame rates when
motion is detected. The camera will return to the normal frame
rates two seconds after the last motion is detected.
On event
Select this check box to use the speedup frame rates when an
event occurs and until another event occurs. Use of speedup on
event requires that events have been defined, and that you select
start and stop events in the neighboring lists.
Start Event
Select the relevant start event. The camera begins using the
speedup frame rates when the start event occurs.
Stop Event
Select the relevant stop event. The camera returns to the normal
frame rates when the stop event occurs.
Advanced configuration
83
Network Video Management System Standard Edition 2016 R3 - Administrator Manual
Live Frame Rate
The required average frame rate for live video from the camera.
Select the number of frames, then select the time unit interval
(second, minute or hour). The frame rate must be higher than
the frame rate specified under normal mode.
If the camera supports dual stream and you have enabled dual
stream, the Live Frame Rate column is read-only with the value
Dual streaming. You cannot change this.
Recording Frame Rate
Required average frame rate for recorded video from the camera.
Select the number of frames, then select the time unit interval
(second, minute or hour). The frame rate must be higher than
the frame rate specified under normal mode.
Speedup does not necessarily have to be based on motion- or events, you can also use scheduling
to configure speedup based on particular periods of time. If you prefer such time-based speedup,
you should still enable the use of speedup by selecting the Enable speedup check box.
Dual stream
Enable dedicated live
stream
This additional stream feature lets you use the alternative stream
of the camera. It enables two independent streams to the
recording server—a stream for live viewing and another stream
for recording purposes, with different resolution, encoding, and
frame rate.
Stream
Select the type of the live stream. Stream settings for viewing
live video and for recording video may very well be different in
order to get the best result.
Resolution
Select the resolution of the camera.
FPS
Select the camera's live frame rate per second (FPS)
MPEG video format
Frame rate
Frame rate per second
Frame rate for viewing live and recorded video from the camera.
Select number of frames per second.
Record keyframes only
Key frames stored at specified intervals record the entire view of
the camera, whereas the following frames record only pixels that
change. This helps greatly reducing the size of MPEG files. Select
the check box if you only want to record keyframes. Note that
you can specify exceptions if motion is detected or events occur.
Record all frames on motion
Allows you to make exceptions if you have selected to record
keyframes only. Select this check box to record all frames when
motion is detected. Two seconds after the last motion is
detected, the camera will return to recording keyframes only.
Advanced configuration
84
Network Video Management System Standard Edition 2016 R3 - Administrator Manual
Record all frames on event
Allows you to make exceptions if you have selected to record
keyframes only. Select this check box to record all frames when
an event occurs and until another event occurs. Use of this
feature requires that events have been defined, and that you
select start and stop events in the neighboring lists.
Start Event
Use when recording on Event or Motion Detection and
Event. Select the relevant start event. The camera begins
recording all frames when the start event occurs.
Stop Event
Select the relevant stop event. The camera only records
keyframes when the stop event occurs.
Dual stream
Enable dedicated live
stream
This additional stream feature lets you use the alternative stream
of the camera. It enables two independent streams to the
recording server—a stream for live viewing and another stream
for recording purposes, with different resolution, encoding, and
frame rate.
Stream
Select the type of the live stream. Stream settings for viewing
live video and for recording video may very well be different in
order to get the best result.
Resolution
Select the resolution of the camera.
FPS
Select the camera's live frame rate per second (FPS)
Audio (properties)
When you configure video and recording (see "About video and recording configuration" on page
61) for specific cameras, properties include the possibility of selecting a default microphone and/or
speaker for the camera. With a default microphone and/or speaker selected for a camera, audio
from the microphone and/or speaker is automatically used when you view video from the camera.
If a microphone or a speaker is attached to the same hardware device as the camera, the
particular microphone/speaker is the camera's default microphone/speaker if you do not select
otherwise.
Default Microphone
Select a default microphone.
Default Speaker
Select a default speaker.
You can only select a default microphone or speaker for the camera if at least one microphone
and/or speaker has been attached to a hardware device on the surveillance system.
Recording
The term recording means saving video and, if applicable, audio from a camera in the camera's
database on the surveillance system server.
Video/audio is often saved only when there is a reason to do so, for example as long as motion is
detected, when an event occurs and until another event occurs, or within a certain period of time.
Advanced configuration
85
Network Video Management System Standard Edition 2016 R3 - Administrator Manual
When you configure video and recording (see "About video and recording configuration" on page
61) for specific cameras, recording properties include:
Always
Record whenever the camera is enabled (see "General" on page
81) and scheduled to be online (see "Online period" on page
124). The latter option allows for time-based recording.
Never
Never record. Live video is shown, but users cannot play back
video from the camera because no video is kept in the database.
Record when certain conditions are met. When you select this
option, specify required conditions (see the following) which
enables you to store recordings from periods preceding and
following detected motion and/or specified events.
Conditionally
Built-in motion detection
On event
Example: If you have defined that video should be stored when a
door is opened, being able to see what happened immediately
prior to the door being opened may also be important. Say you
have specified that video should be stored conditionally on event,
with a start event called Door Opened and a stop event called
Door Closed. With three seconds of pre-recording, video is
recorded from three seconds before Door Opened occurs and
until Door Closed occurs.
Select this check box to record video in which motion (see
"Motion detection & exclude regions" on page 90) is detected.
Unless post-recording (see the following) is used, recording will
stop immediately after the last motion is detected.
Select this check box to record video when an event occurs and
until another event occurs. Use of recording on event requires
that events (see "Overview of events and output" on page 100)
have been defined, and that you select start and stop events in
the neighboring lists.
Use the Configure events list located below the other fields to
define events that suit your needs.
Start Event
Select the relevant start event. Recording will begin when the
start event occurs, or earlier if you use pre-recording. See the
following.
Stop Event
Select the relevant stop event. Recording will end when the stop
event occurs, or later if you use post-recording. See the
following.
Available only when the option Conditional is selected.
Enable pre-recording
Specify the number of seconds for which you want to record video
from before recording start conditions (that is motion or start
event) are met.
Available only when the option Conditional is selected.
Enable post-recording
Specify the number of seconds for which you want to record video
after recording stop conditions (that is motion end or stop event)
are met.
Note that manual recording (on page 75) may be enabled. With manual recording, users of
Network Video Management System Smart Client with the necessary rights can manually start
recording if they see something of interest while viewing live video from a camera that is not
Advanced configuration
86
Network Video Management System Standard Edition 2016 R3 - Administrator Manual
already recording. If enabled, manual recording can take place even if recording for individual
cameras is set to Never or Conditionally.
Recording and archiving paths
When you configure video and recording (see "About video and recording configuration" on page
61) for specific cameras, properties include:
A path to the folder in which the camera's database should be
stored. The default folder is C:\MediaDatabase. To browse for
another folder, click the browse icon next to the required cell. You
can only specify a path to a folder on a local drive. You cannot
specify a path to a network drive. If you use a network drive, you
cannot save recordings if the network drive becomes unavailable.
Recording Path
If you change the recording path, and you have existing
recordings at the old location, you are asked whether you want to
move the recordings to the new location, leave them at the old
location, or delete them.
If you have several cameras, and several local drives are
available, you can improve performance by distributing individual
cameras' databases across several drives.
Click button to delete all recordings in the database for the
camera. Archived recordings are not affected.
Delete Database
Important: Use with caution. All recordings in the database for
the camera are permanently deleted. As a security measure, you
must confirm that you want to delete the database.
The path to the folder in which the camera's archived recordings
should be stored. The default folder is C:\MediaDatabase. You can
only edit this if you do not use dynamic paths for archiving.
Archiving Path
To browse for another folder, click the browse icon next to the
relevant cell. If you change the archiving path, and there are
existing archived recordings at the old location, you are asked
whether you want to move the archived recordings to the new
location, leave them at the old location, or delete them. Sony
recommends that you move the archiving recordings to a new
location.
Note that if you move archived recordings, your system also
archives what is currently in the camera database. In case you
wonder why the camera database is empty just after you have
moved archived recordings, this is the reason.
Delete Archives
Click button to delete all archived recordings for the camera.
Recordings in the camera's regular database will not be affected.
The ability to delete is available regardless of whether you use a
single archiving path or dynamic archiving paths.
Important: Use with caution. All archived recordings for the
camera are permanently deleted. As a security measure, you
must confirm that you want to delete the archives.
Advanced configuration
87
Network Video Management System Standard Edition 2016 R3 - Administrator Manual
Retention time
The total amount of time for which you want to keep recordings
from the camera, that is, recordings in the camera's database as
well as any archived recordings. The default retention time is 7
days.
Retention time covers the total amount of time you want to keep
recordings for. In earlier versions of your surveillance system,
you specified time limits separately for the database and
archives.
Select which action to take if the database becomes corrupted:
Database Repair Action
•
Repair, scan, delete if fails: Default action. If the database
becomes corrupted, two different repair methods is
attempted: a fast repair and a thorough repair. If both repair
methods fail, the contents of the database are deleted.
•
Repair, delete if fails: If the database becomes corrupted, a
fast repair is attempted. If the fast repair fails, the contents of
the database are deleted.
•
Repair, archive if fails: If the database becomes corrupted,
a fast repair is attempted. If the fast repair fails, the contents
of the database are archived.
•
Delete (no repair): If the database becomes corrupted, the
contents of the database are deleted.
•
Archive (no repair): If the database becomes corrupted,
the contents of the database are archived.
•
Scan, archive if fails: If the database becomes corrupted,
all files in the database are scanned for errors and a thorough
repair of the database is attempted. This action takes more
time to complete than the other repair actions, but ensures
that a restore of all content in the database takes place.
If you choose an action to repair a corrupt database, this corrupt
database is closed while it is repaired. Instead, a new database is
created to allow recordings to continue.
Network Video Management System Smart Client can often repair
a corrupt database if it has been archived. When you open the
corrupt database in Network Video Management System Smart
Client, Network Video Management System Smart Client repairs
the database automatically if at all possible.
Configure Dynamic Paths
With dynamic archiving paths, you specify a number of different
archiving paths, usually across several drives. If the drive
containing the camera's database is among the path you have
selected for dynamic archiving, your system always tries to
archive to that path first. If not, the system automatically
archives to the archiving drive with the most available space at
any time, provided there is not a camera database using that
drive.
See also Dynamic path selection (see "Dynamic path selection
(properties)" on page 69).
Advanced configuration
88
Network Video Management System Standard Edition 2016 R3 - Administrator Manual
Event notification
When you configure video and recording (see "About video and recording configuration" on page
61) for specific cameras, properties include event notification. Event notifications inform Network
Video Management System Smart Client users that an event has occurred on your system. Event
notifications can be valuable for client users, as they can quickly detect that an event has occurred.
Even though you configure event notifications separately for each camera, you can select between
all events on your system, regardless whether events are manual, generic or originate on another
hardware device than the camera itself.
In Network Video Management System Smart Client, event notification is given by a yellow
indicator
which lights up when a relevant event has taken place. You can also add an optional
sound on event notification in Network Video Management System Smart Client itself.
Three indicators are available for each camera in Network
Video Management System Smart Client:
•
The yellow
event indicator. Lights up when a
relevant event has taken place.
•
A red
motion indicator. Lights up when motion
has been detected.
•
An optional green
video indicator. Lights up
when video is received from the camera.
You can turn off the bar in which the indicators are
displayed in Network Video Management System Smart
Client. Do not turn off if Network Video Management
System Smart Client must rely on event notifications.
Select required events
1. In the Available events list, select the relevant event. You can only select one event at a
time.
2. Click the >> button to copy the selected event to the Selected Events list.
3. Repeat for each required event.
If you later want to remove an event from the Selected Events list, select the relevant event, and
click the << button.
Output
When you configure video and recording (see "About video and recording configuration" on page
61) for specific cameras, you can also associate a camera with particular hardware output (see
"Add a hardware output" on page 102), for example the sounding of a siren or the switching on of
lights.
Associated output can then be activated automatically when motion is detected in video from the
camera, or manually when Network Video Management System Smart Client users with the
necessary rights (see "Configure user and group rights" on page 141) view live video from the
camera.
1. In the Available output list, select the required output. It is only possible to select one
output at a time. If you have not yet defined any suitable output, you can quickly do it:
Use the Configure Output button, located below the other fields.
2. Click the >> button to copy the selected output to the:
Advanced configuration
89
Network Video Management System Standard Edition 2016 R3 - Administrator Manual
•
On manual activation list, in which case the output is available for manual
activation in Network Video Management System Smart Client.
and/or
•
On motion detected list, in which case the output is activated when motion is
detected in video from the camera. If relevant, the same output can appear on both
lists.
3. Repeat for each required output.
If you later want to remove an output from the one of the lists, select the output in question, and
click the << button.
Motion detection & exclude regions
When you configure video and recording (see "About video and recording configuration" on page
61) for specific cameras, adjusting motion detection is important because it may determine when
video from the camera is recorded, when email notifications are generated or when hardware
output, such as lights or sirens, is activated. Time spent on finding the best possible motion
detection settings for each camera may help you later avoid unnecessary recordings and
notifications. Depending on the physical location of the camera, it may be a very good idea to test
motion detection under different physical conditions such as day/night or windy/calm weather.
Before you configure motion detection for a camera, you should configure the camera's video
properties (see "General" on page 81) including compression and resolution.
Cameras that do not support multiple simultaneous video streams cannot connect to the
surveillance server and the Management Application at the same time. Sony recommends that you
stop (see "Start and stop services" on page 147) the Recording Server service when you configure
such devices for motion detection and PTZ.
See also View video from cameras in the Management Application (see "View video from cameras
in Management Application" on page 35).
Enable
Enable or disable (see "About motion detection" on page 62) the
built-in motion detection.
Turn the grid on and off.
Show grid
Turning the grid off may provide a less obscured view of the
preview image. You select the areas to exclude from motion
detection the same way as when the grid is visible. When the grid
is turned on, the preview image is divided into small sections by a
grid.
To define areas which should be excluded from motion detection,
drag the mouse over the areas in the preview image while
pressing the mouse button down. The left mouse button selects a
grid section and the right mouse button clears a grid section.
Selected areas are highlighted in blue.
Include All
Quickly select all grid sections in the preview image. This can be
useful if you want to exclude motion detection in most areas of
the image, in which case you can clear the few sections in which
you do not want to exclude motion detection.
Exclude All
Clear all grid sections in the preview image.
Advanced configuration
90
Network Video Management System Standard Edition 2016 R3 - Administrator Manual
Enable this functionality to adjust the Sensitivity slide for motion
yourself.
Drag the slider to the left for a higher sensitivity level, and to the
right for a lower sensitivity level.
Manual sensitivity
•
The higher the sensitivity level, the less change is allowed in
each pixel before it is regarded as motion.
•
The lower the sensitivity level, the more change in each pixel
is allowed before it is regarded as motion.
Pixels in which motion is detected are highlighted in green in the
preview image.
Sony recommends that you do not enable manual sensitivity
because:
•
With dynamic sensitivity, the system calculates and optimizes
the sensitivity level automatically and suppresses motion
detections that come from noise in the images.
•
Dynamic sensitivity improves motion detection at nighttime,
where the noise in the images often triggers false motion.
•
The system is not overloaded from too much recording.
•
The users are not missing results from insufficient recording.
Use this setting to determine how much each pixel must change
before it is regarded as motion. With a high sensitivity, very little
change in a pixel is required before the system regards it as
motion. Areas in which motion is detected are highlighted in
green in the preview image.
Sensitivity
Select a slider position in which only detections you consider
motion are highlighted. The more you drag the slider to the left,
the more of the preview image becomes highlighted. This is
because with a high sensitivity even the slightest change in a
pixel is regarded as motion.
As an alternative to using the slider, you may specify a value
between 0 and 256 in the field next to the slider to control the
sensitivity setting.
Motion
Adjust the Motion slider so that motion detection is only
triggered by the required level of motion. The selected motion
level is indicated by the black vertical line in the Level bar above
the sliders. The black vertical line serves as a threshold. When
motion is above (to the right of) the selected level, the bar
changes color from green to red, indicating a positive motion
detection.
Alternatively, specify a value between 0 and 10000 in the field on
the left to control the motion setting.
The more you drag the slider to the left, the more positive motion
detections you see because less change will be needed to trigger
a positive motion detection. The number of positive motion
detections may also affect the amount of video you record, the
amount of notifications you receive and more.
Advanced configuration
91
Network Video Management System Standard Edition 2016 R3 - Administrator Manual
Keyframe Only
Detection interval
Select Keyframe only if you want motion detection to take place
only on keyframes of the video stream to reduce the system
resources used on motion detection.
Specify how often motion detection analysis is carried out on
video from the camera. The default is every 240 milliseconds
(close to once a quarter of a second). The interval is applied
regardless of your cameras' frame rate settings.
Adjusting this setting can help lower the amount of system
resources used on motion detection.
Detection resolution
Specify whether the full image or a selected percentage of the
image should be analyzed. For example, by specifying 25%,
every fourth pixel is analyzed instead of all pixels, reducing the
system resources used but also offering less accurate motion
detection.
Privacy masking
Set the following properties for privacy masking:
Enable
Enable the Privacy Masking feature.
Turn the grid on or off. Turning the grid off may provide a less
obscured view of the preview image. Select areas to exclude the
same way as you would when the grid is visible.
Show grid
When on, the preview image is divided into small sections by a
grid. To define areas which should be excluded from privacy
masking, drag the mouse over the areas in the preview image
while pressing the mouse button down. The left mouse button
selects a grid section and the right mouse button clears a grid
section. Selected areas are highlighted in red.
Show privacy mask
Turn the red area indicating privacy masking on or off. Turning
off the red area may provide a less obscured view of the preview
image.
Clear
Clear the privacy masking.
Fisheye lens (properties)
Fisheye lens technology allows you to view panoramic video through an advanced fisheye lens.
To use fisheye lens technology, you must enable the technology and, in some cases, enter a
special license key. If you are unsure if you need a special fisheye license key, contact your system
vendor for further information.
Enable fisheye lens support
Advanced configuration
Select the check box to enable use of the fisheye lens technology
and to be able to specify further properties.
92
Network Video Management System Standard Edition 2016 R3 - Administrator Manual
Immervision Enables®
panomorph RPL number
When you enable the panomorph support functionality, you must
also select a Registered Panomorph Lens (RPL) number from the
ImmerVision Enables® panomorph RPL number list to ensure
that the lens is correctly identified and configured with the lens
used with the camera. You can usually find the RPL number on
the lens itself or on the box it came in.
•
If you want to add additional types of lenses, go to File and
select Import new lens types. Locate the .xml file that
contains information about the lens type and press OK.
For details of ImmerVision, panomorph lenses, and RPLs, see the
ImmerVision Enables website
https://www.immervisionenables.com/.
Camera position/orientation
Choose whether the camera is mounted in the ceiling, on a wall
or on ground level.
PTZ preset positions
PTZ-related properties are only available when you are dealing with a pan-tilt-zoom (PTZ) camera.
You can use PTZ preset positions for making the PTZ camera automatically go to a particular
position when particular events occur, and when setting up PTZ patrolling profiles. Preset positions
can also be used in clients to allow users that have been given rights (see "Configure user and
group rights" on page 141) to move the PTZ camera between preset positions. Names of preset
positions must contain only the characters A-Z, a-z and the digits 0-9. If you import preset
positions from cameras, verify that their names do not contain other characters. If they do, change
the preset position names before you import them.
Cameras that do not support multiple simultaneous video streams cannot connect to the
surveillance server and the Management Application at the same time. Sony recommends that you
stop (see "Start and stop services" on page 147) the Recording Server service when you configure
such devices for motion detection and PTZ.
See also View video from cameras in the Management Application (see "View video from cameras
in Management Application" on page 35).
Your configuration options depend on the type of PTZ camera in
question:
Type 1 (stored on server): You define preset positions by moving
the camera using the controls in the upper half of the window,
then storing each required position on the system server. You can
define up to 50 preset positions this way.
PTZ type
Type 2 (imported from camera): You import preset positions
which have previously been defined and stored on the PTZ
camera itself through the camera's own configuration interface.
The number of allowed preset positions depends on the PTZ
camera and driver used.
Type 3 (stored on camera): You define preset positions by
moving the camera with the controls in the upper half of the
window, then storing each required position in the camera's own
memory. You can define up to 50 preset positions this way. If
preset positions have already been defined for the camera, you
can simply import them for use with the system.
Advanced configuration
93
Network Video Management System Standard Edition 2016 R3 - Administrator Manual
Only available when you have selected PTZ type 2 or 3. Lets you
import already defined preset positions from the camera's
memory for use with the system.
Import / Refresh
Add New
If you have already imported preset positions this way, and
preset positions have since then been added or changed on the
camera, you can use this button to refresh the imported preset
positions.
Only available when you have selected PTZ type 1. When you
have move the camera to a required position using the controls in
the upper half of the window, type a name for the position in the
blank field, then click the button to add the position to the list of
defined preset positions.
Remember that names of preset positions must contain only the
characters A-Z, a-z and the digits 0-9.
Set New Position
Only available when you have selected PTZ type 1 or 3. Lets you
change an already defined preset position. In the list, select the
preset position you want to change. Then move the camera to the
new required position using the controls in the upper half of the
window. Then click the button to overwrite the old position with
the new one.
Only available when you have selected PTZ type 1 or 3. Lets you
delete an already defined preset. In the list, select the preset
position you want to delete, then click the button.
Delete
Before you delete a preset position, make sure it is not used in
PTZ patrolling or PTZ on event. Since the preset positions are
stored on the camera, you can bring a deleted preset position
back into your system by clicking the Import / refresh button.
If you bring back a preset position this way, and you use the
preset position with PTZ patrolling or PTZ on event, you must
manually configure the PTZ patrolling and/or PTZ on event to use
the preset position again.
Test
Try out a preset position. In the list, select the preset position
you want to test, then click the button to view the camera move
to the selected position.
PTZ control wheel
Move a preset position selected in the list up and down
respectively. The selected preset position is moved one step per
click. By moving preset positions up or down, you can control the
sequence in which preset positions are presented in clients.
PTZ patrolling (properties)
Cameras that do not support multiple simultaneous video streams cannot connect to the
surveillance server and the Management Application at the same time. Sony recommends that you
stop (see "Start and stop services" on page 147) the Recording Server service when you configure
such devices for motion detection and PTZ.
See also View video from cameras in the Management Application (see "View video from cameras
in Management Application" on page 35).
You can only set PTZ-related properties for pan-tilt-zoom (PTZ) cameras. PTZ patrolling is the
continuous movement of a PTZ camera between a number of preset positions. To use patrolling,
Advanced configuration
94
Network Video Management System Standard Edition 2016 R3 - Administrator Manual
you must specify at least two preset positions for the relevant PTZ camera. To configure PTZ
patrolling, select a patrolling profile in the Patrolling profiles list and specify relevant properties
to define the exact behavior of the patrolling profile. When you have defined your patrolling profiles,
remember to schedule the use of patrolling profiles. Note that if users manually operate PTZ
cameras, this can override patrolling. You can specify a patrolling profile with only one preset if
needed. Such a patrolling profile can be useful in two cases: for moving a PTZ camera to a specific
position at a specific time, and for moving a PTZ camera to a specific position upon manual control
of the PTZ camera.
Patrolling profiles
A PTZ camera may patrol according to several different patrolling profiles. For example, a PTZ
camera in a supermarket may patrol according to one patrolling profile during opening hours, and
according to another patrolling profile when the supermarket is closed. You can reuse the names of
patrolling profiles defined for other cameras. This allows you to use a single patrolling profile name
across several PTZ cameras, and can make scheduling of PTZ patrolling much easier. Even though
several PTZ cameras share a patrolling profile name, the movement between preset positions is
individual for each camera.
From the Patrolling profiles list, select which patrolling profile to configure:
Add a new patrolling profile to the list. When you add a new
patrolling profile, you can either give it a unique name, or reuse
an existing name from another PTZ camera with PTZ patrolling.
Add New
Delete
Using several identically named patrolling profiles can be
advantageous when you later configure scheduling. Example: If
you have configured patrolling profiles identically named Night
Patrolling on 25 different cameras, you can schedule the use of
Night Patrolling on all 25 cameras in one go, even though Night
Patrolling covers individual preset positions on each of the 25
cameras.
Delete an existing patrolling profile. Note that the selected
patrolling profile is removed from the list without further warning.
Patrolling list
Having selected a patrolling profile in the Patrolling profiles list, you can specify which of the PTZ
button to copy a
camera's preset positions to use with the selected patrolling scheme. Use the
selected preset positions to the Patrolling list. To change the sequence of preset positions in the
or
buttons to move the selected
Preset Positions list, select a preset position, and use the
preset position up or down in the list. The selected preset position is moved one step per click. If
you later want to remove a preset position from the Patrolling list, select the preset position in
button.
question, and click the
Wait time (sec.)
Advanced configuration
Specify the number of seconds for which the PTZ camera should
stay at each preset position before it moves on to the next preset
position. The default is 10 seconds. The wait time applies to all
presets in the patrolling profile. The PTZ camera stays at each
preset position for the same number of seconds.
95
Network Video Management System Standard Edition 2016 R3 - Administrator Manual
Specify the number of seconds needed for the PTZ camera to
move from one preset position to another. The default is five
seconds. During this transition time, motion detection is
automatically disabled, as irrelevant motion is otherwise likely to
be detected while the camera moves between the preset
positions. After the specified number of seconds, motion detection
is automatically enabled again.
Transition time (sec.)
The transition time applies to all presets in the patrolling profile.
It is important that the camera can switch between any of the
patrolling profile's preset positions within the number of seconds
you specify. If not, the system is likely to detect false motion.
Note that it takes longer for the PTZ camera to move between
positions that are located physically far apart (for example from
an extreme left position to an extreme right position) than
between positions that are located physically close together.
Pause PTZ patrolling
PTZ patrolling pauses automatically when users operate the camera manually as well if your
system is using PTZ on Event. If the system detects motion, it may also pause PTZ patrolling.
Pause settings are tied to the selected patrolling profile. This allows you the flexibility of having
different pause settings for different patrolling profiles on the same camera.
Pause patrolling if motion is detected
To pause PTZ patrolling when the system detects motion, so that the PTZ camera remains at the
position where the system detected motion for a specified period of time, do the following:
1. Select the Pause patrolling if motion is detected check box.
2. Select whether the PTZ camera should resume patrolling:
•
After a certain number of seconds has passed since first detection of motion,
regardless whether further motion is detected
or
•
After a certain number of seconds has passed without further detection of motion
3. Specify the number of seconds for the selected option (default is ten and five seconds
respectively).
4. Unless the transition time is set to zero, the system automatically disables motion detection
while the camera moves between preset positions, as the system is likely to detect
irrelevant motion otherwise while the camera moves between the preset positions.
Resume PTZ patrolling
The system automatically pauses PTZ patrolling when users operate the camera manually as well
as if PTZ on Event is in use. You can specify how many seconds should pass before the system
resumes regular patrolling after a manual or event-based interruption. The default is 30 seconds.
Apart from manual control, users of Network Video Management System Smart Client can also stop
a selected PTZ camera's patrolling entirely. For Network Video Management System Smart Client
users, the number of seconds specified in the Patrolling settings section therefore only applies
when users manually control a PTZ camera and not when users stop a PTZ camera's patrolling
Advanced configuration
96
Network Video Management System Standard Edition 2016 R3 - Administrator Manual
entirely. When Network Video Management System Smart Client users stop a PTZ camera's
patrolling entirely, the camera's patrolling resumes only when the Network Video Management
System Smart Client user selects to resume it.
PTZ on event
PTZ-related properties are only available when you are dealing with a pan-tilt-zoom (PTZ) camera.
When a PTZ camera supports preset positions (see "PTZ preset positions" on page 93), you can
make the PTZ camera automatically go to a particular preset position when a particular event
occurs (see "Overview of events and output" on page 100). When associating events with preset
positions on a PTZ camera, you can select between all events defined on your system. You are not
limited to selecting events defined on a particular hardware device.
Component
Requirement
Event
Select the relevant event.
Select the relevant preset position. For this purpose, you can only
use an event once per PTZ camera. However, use different events
for making the PTZ camera go to the same preset position.
PTZ Preset Position
Example:
•
Event 1 makes the PTZ camera go to preset position A
•
Event 2 makes the PTZ camera go to preset position B
•
Event 3 makes the PTZ camera go to preset position A
If later you want to end the association between a particular event and a particular preset position,
clear the field containing the event. After you have made the PTZ setting changes, restart services
(see "Start and stop services" on page 147).
Cameras that do not support multiple simultaneous video streams cannot connect to the
surveillance server and the Management Application at the same time. Sony recommends that you
stop (see "Start and stop services" on page 147) the Recording Server service when you configure
such devices for motion detection and PTZ.
See also View video from cameras in the Management Application (see "View video from cameras
in Management Application" on page 35).
Microphones
About microphones
In your system, Microphones are typically attached to hardware devices, and therefore physically
located next to cameras. Operators, with the necessary rights, can listen to recordings through
Network Video Management System Smart Client if the computer running Network Video
Management System Smart Client has speakers attached. You manage microphones on your
system, meaning you can always manage the microphones attached to cameras, not microphones
attached to Network Video Management System Smart Client operators' computers.
If you have added more microphones to your system than you need, you can hide the ones you do
not need by right-clicking the relevant microphone or speaker and select Hide. If you need the
Advanced configuration
97
Network Video Management System Standard Edition 2016 R3 - Administrator Manual
hidden microphone again, you can right-click the overall microphone icon and select Show Hidden
Items.
Configure microphones or speakers
1. Expand Advanced Configuration > Hardware Devices, and expand the hardware
device to which the relevant microphone or speaker is attached.
2. Right-click the relevant microphone or speaker, and select Properties.
3. Specify properties (see "Speaker properties" on page 58) as required.
Configuration of microphones and speakers in your system is very basic. You control volume
settings and similar settings on the microphone or speaker units themselves.
Show or hide microphones or speakers
If you have added more microphones or speakers to your system than you need, you can hide the
ones you do not need by right-clicking the relevant microphone or speaker and select Hide. If you
need the hidden microphone/speaker again, you can right-click the overall microphone or speaker
icon and select Show Hidden Items.
Microphone (properties)
When you configure video and recording (see "About video and recording configuration" on page
61) for specific cameras, you can determine when to record audio. Your choice applies for all
cameras on your system.
Microphone properties
Enabled
Microphones are by default enabled, meaning that they can
transfer audio to your system. If needed, you can disable an
individual microphone, in which case no audio is transferred from
the microphone to your system.
Name
The name as it appears in the Management Application as well as
in clients. You can overwrite the existing name with a new one.
Names must be unique, and must not contain any of these special
characters: < > & ' " \ / : * ? | [ ]
On some hardware devices, you can also enable/disable audio on the hardware device itself,
typically through the hardware device's own configuration web page. If audio on a hardware device
does not work after enabling it in the Management Application, you should verify if the problem
exists because audio is disabled on the hardware device itself.
Advanced configuration
98
Network Video Management System Standard Edition 2016 R3 - Administrator Manual
Recording settings
Always
Always record audio on all applicable cameras.
Follow video
Recording audio only when video is recorded from a camera that
has a microphone attached.
Never
Never record audio on any cameras. Note that even though the
system never records audio, you can still listen to live audio in
Network Video Management System Smart Client.
Events and output
About input and output
Hardware input, such as door sensors, can be attached to input ports on hardware devices. Input
from such external hardware input units can be used for generating events in your system.
Hardware output units can be attached to output ports on many hardware devices, allowing you
to activate lights, sirens, and more from your system. Such hardware output can be activated
automatically by events, or manually from clients.
Before you specify use of hardware input and hardware output units on a hardware device, verify
the hardware device recognized the sensor operation. Most hardware devices are capable of
showing this in their configuration interfaces, or via CGI script commands. Also check the system's
release notes to verify that the hardware device and firmware used supports input and
output-controlled operations.
You do not have to configure hardware input units separately. Any hardware input units connected
to hardware devices are automatically detected when you add the hardware devices to your system.
The same goes for hardware output, but hardware output does require some simple configuration
in your system.
If you want to configure hardware output and automatically trigger output when events
occur, so that, for example, lights are switched on when a door is opened or when motion is
detected in video, see Add a hardware output (on page 102) and Configure hardware output on
event (on page 104).
About events and output
You can use events and output of various types to automatically trigger actions in your system.
Examples of actions: starting or stopping recording on cameras, switching to a particular video
frame rate, triggering notifications, making PTZ cameras move to specific preset positions. You can
also use events for activating hardware output. You can also configure events and output to
generate alarms.
Events can be divided in to:
•
Internal events (system-related): for example, motion, server responding/not
responding, archiving problems and lack of disk space.
•
External events (integrated): for example, plug-in events.
Advanced configuration
99
Network Video Management System Standard Edition 2016 R3 - Administrator Manual
Overview of events and output
Types of events:
Name
Description
You can use analytics events as alarms and integrate seamlessly
with the Alarms feature.
Analytics events:
Analytics events are typically data received from external
third-party video content analysis (VCA) providers. An example of
a VCA-based system could be an access control system.
Hardware input, such as door sensors, can be attached to input
ports on hardware devices. Input from such external hardware
input units can be used for generating events in the system.
Events based on input from hardware input units attached to
hardware devices are called hardware input events.
Hardware input events:
Some hardware devices have their own capabilities for detecting
motion, for detecting moving and/or static objects and more
(configured in the hardware devices' own software, typically by
accessing a browser-based configuration interface on the
hardware device's IP address.) When this is the case, your
system considers such detections as input from the hardware,
and you can use such detections as input events as well.
Lastly, hardware input events can be based on the system
detecting motion in video from a camera, based on motion
detection settings in the system.
This type of hardware input events is also called system motion
detection events or VMD (Video Motion Detection) events. In
earlier versions of the surveillance system, VMD events were an
event type of their own. They are now considered a type of
hardware input event.
Hardware output:
Hardware output units can be attached to output ports on many
hardware devices, allowing you to activate lights, sirens, and
more from the system. Such hardware output can be activated
automatically by events, or manually from clients.
Events may be generated manually by the users selecting them
in their clients. These events are called manual events.
Manual events can be of the type Global events or Timer
events:
Manual events:
Global events apply to all hardware whereas timer events are
separate events, triggered by the hardware input event, manual
event or generic event under which they are defined. Timer
events occur a specified number of seconds or minutes after the
event, under which they are defined, has occurred. Timer events
may be used for a wide variety of purposes, typically for stopping
previously triggered actions.
Example:
A camera starts recording based on a hardware input event, for
example when a door is opened. A timer event stops the
recording after 15 seconds.
Advanced configuration
100
Network Video Management System Standard Edition 2016 R3 - Administrator Manual
Name
Description
Generic events:
Input may also be received in the form of TCP or UDP data
packages, which the system can analyze, and—if they match
specified criteria—use to generate events. Such events are called
generic events.
Hardware output can be activated automatically when events
occur. For example, when a door is opened (hardware input
event), lights are switched on (hardware output).
Output control on event:
When you configure the output control, you can select between
all output and events defined in the system. You are not limited
to selecting output or events defined on particular hardware
devices. You can use a single event for activating more than one
output.
Before you configure events of any type, configure general event handling, such as which ports
the system should use for event data. Normally, you can just use the default values, but it is a
good idea to verify that your organization is not already using the ports for other purposes. See
Configure general event handling (on page 105).
Before you specify use of hardware input and hardware output units on a hardware device, verify
that sensor operation is recognized by the hardware device. Most hardware devices are capable of
showing this in their configuration interfaces, or via CGI script commands. Also check the
surveillance system's release notes to verify that input and output controlled operations are
supported for the hardware device and firmware used. If you are using several servers in a
master/slave setup, input and output on a specific hardware device should be defined on one of the
servers only. Do not define the same input or output on the same hardware device on several
servers.
You do not have to configure hardware input units separately. Any hardware input units connected
to hardware devices are automatically detected when you add the hardware devices to the system.
The same goes for hardware output, but hardware output does require some simple configuration
in the system.
If you want to configure hardware output and automatically trigger output when events
occur, so that, for example, lights are switched on when a door is opened or when motion is
detected in video, see Add a hardware output (on page 102) and Configure hardware output on
event (on page 104).
When you are ready to configure events, see Add a hardware input event (on page 102), Add a
generic event (on page 103), and Add a manual event (on page 103). If you want to use timer
events with your other events, see Add a timer event (on page 104).
Add an analytics event
To add an analytics event, do the following:
1. Expand Events and Output, right-click Analytics Events and select Create New.
2. Specify required properties. Click OK.
3. Save your configuration changes by clicking Save in the yellow notification bar in the
upper-right corner of the Management Application.
Advanced configuration
101
Network Video Management System Standard Edition 2016 R3 - Administrator Manual
Add a hardware input event
With hardware input events, you can turn input received from input units attached to hardware
devices into events (see "Overview of events and output" on page 100) in your system.
Before you specify input for a hardware device, verify the hardware device recognizes sensor
operation. Most hardware devices can show this in their configuration interfaces, or via CGI script
commands. Also check the release notes to verify that input-controlled operation is supported for
the hardware device and firmware used.
To add and/or configure a hardware input event, do the following:
1. Expand Advanced Configuration > Events and Output. Right-click Hardware Input
Events > Enable New Input Event.
2. In the Hardware Input Event Properties window's list of hardware devices, expand the
relevant hardware device to see a list of pre-defined hardware input.
3. Select the required types of input to use them as events. The types of input often vary
from camera to camera. If motion detection (see "Motion detection & exclude regions" on
page 90) is enabled in the system for the relevant camera, note the input type System
Motion Detection, which lets you turn detected motion in the camera's video stream into
an event.
Note that some types of input are mutually exclusive. When you select one type of input,
you may therefore note that other types of input become unavailable for selection.
4. For each selected type of input, select required properties (see "Hardware input event" on
page 109). When ready, click OK, or click the Add button to add a timer event (on page
104) to the event you have just created.
5. Save your configuration changes by clicking Save in the yellow notification bar in the
upper-right corner of the Management Application.
Add a hardware output
With hardware output, you can add external output units, such as lights, sirens and door openers,
to your system. Once added, output can be activated automatically by events (see "Overview of
events and output" on page 100) or detected motion, or manually by client users.
Before you specify output, verify that sensor operation is recognized by the hardware device with
which you are going to use the output. Most hardware devices are capable of showing this in their
configuration interfaces, or via CGI script commands. Also check the release notes to verify that
output-controlled operation is supported for the hardware device and firmware used.
To add a hardware output event, do the following:
1. Expand Advanced Configuration > Events and Output. Right-click Hardware Output
> Add New Output.
2. In the Hardware Output Properties window's list of hardware devices, select the
relevant hardware device, and click the Add button below the list.
3. Specify required properties (see "Hardware input event" on page 109).
4. Click OK.
5. Save your configuration changes by clicking Save in the yellow notification bar in the
upper-right corner of the Management Application.
Advanced configuration
102
Network Video Management System Standard Edition 2016 R3 - Administrator Manual
For information about how to configure automatic activation of hardware output when events occur,
see Configure hardware output on event (on page 104). You configure output for manual activation
in clients as well as for automatic activation on detected motion individually for each camera (see
"Output" on page 89).
Add a manual event
With manual events, your users with required rights (see "Configure user and group rights" on
page 141) can trigger events manually from their clients. Manual events can be global (shared by
all cameras) or tied to a particular camera (only available when the camera is selected). You can
use manual events for a wide variety of purposes, for example:
•
As start and stop events for use when scheduling cameras' online periods (see "Online
period" on page 124). For example, you can make a camera start or stop transferring video
to the surveillance system based on a manual event.
•
As start and stop events for controlling other camera settings. For example, you can make
a camera use a higher frame rate based on a manual event or you can use a manual event
for triggering PTZ on event (on page 97).
•
For triggering output. Particular output can be associated (see "Configure hardware output
on event" on page 104) with manual events.
•
For triggering event-based notifications (see "About notifications" on page 130).
•
In combinations. For example, a manual event could make a camera start transferring
video to the surveillance system while an output is triggered and an e-mail notification is
sent to relevant people.
To add a manual event, do the following:
1. Expand Advanced Configuration > Events and Output. Right-click Manual Events >
Add New Manual Event
2. In the list in the left side of the Manual Event Properties, select global or a camera as
required.
3. Click the add button and specify required properties (see "Hardware input event" on page
109). When ready, click OK, or click the Add button again to add a timer event (on page
104) to the event you have just created.
4. Save your configuration changes by clicking Save in the yellow notification bar in the
upper-right corner of the Management Application.
Add a generic event
Your system can analyze received TCP and/or UDP data packages, and automatically trigger events
(see "Overview of events and output" on page 100) when specified criteria are met. This way, you
can easily integrate your surveillance system with a range of external sources, for example access
control systems and alarm systems.
1. Expand Advanced Configuration, then expand Events and Output. Right-click Generic
Events > Properties.
2. In the Generic Event Properties window, click the Add button, and specify the relevant
properties. For more information, see Generic event (on page 112).
3. To add a timer event to the generic event, click the Add button.
Advanced configuration
103
Network Video Management System Standard Edition 2016 R3 - Administrator Manual
4. Save your configuration changes by clicking Save in the yellow notification bar in the
upper-right corner of the Management Application.
Add a timer event
Timer events are separate events (see "Overview of events and output" on page 100), triggered by
the type of event under which they are defined. Timer events occur a specified number of seconds
or minutes after the event under which they are defined has occurred. Timer events may be used
for a wide variety of purposes, typically for stopping previously triggered actions. Examples:
•
A camera starts recording based on a hardware input event, for example when a door is
opened. A timer event stops the recording after 15 seconds
•
Lights are switched on and a camera starts recording based on a manual event. A timer
event stops the recording after one minute, and another timer event switches the lights off
after two minutes
To add a timer event, select any event you have previously configured, click the Add button, and
specify required properties (see "Timer event" on page 112). Your system comes with two simple
schedule profiles, Always on and Always off, which you cannot edit or delete. If these do not
meet your needs, you can create any number of customized schedule profiles for each camera. You
can reuse a customized schedule profile for more than one purpose if you want to. Save your
configuration changes by clicking Save in the yellow notification bar in the upper-right corner of
the Management Application.
Tip: You can add as many timer events as required under an event. This way, you can, for
example, make one timer event trigger something 10 seconds after the main event, another timer
event trigger something else 30 seconds after the main event, and a third timer event trigger
something else 2 minutes after the main event.
Configure hardware output on event
Once you have added hardware output (see "Add a hardware output" on page 102), such as lights,
sirens, door openers and more, you can associate the hardware output with events (see "Overview
of events and output" on page 100). This way, particular hardware output can be activated
automatically when events occur. Example: When a door is opened (hardware input event), lights
are switched on (hardware output).
When making the associations, you can select between all output and events defined on your
surveillance system server. You are not limited to selecting output or events defined on particular
hardware devices.
1. Expand Advanced Configuration, then expand Events and Output. Right-click Output
Control on Event and select Properties.
2. Fill in the relevant properties (see "Output control on event (Events and Output-specific
properties)" on page 116). Click OK.
3. Save your configuration changes by clicking Save in the yellow notification bar in the
upper-right corner of the Management Application.
You can use a single event for activating more than one output. You cannot delete associations, but
you can change your selections or select None in both columns as required.
Note: If you have not yet defined any suitable event or output, you can quickly do it: Use the
Configure events list and/or Configure Output... button, located below the list of associations.
Advanced configuration
104
Network Video Management System Standard Edition 2016 R3 - Administrator Manual
Configure general event handling
Before configuring events of any type, configure general event handling, such as which ports your
system should use for event data. Normally, you can just use the default values, but it is a good
idea to verify that your organization is not already using the ports for other purposes.
1. Expand Advanced Configuration, right-click Events and Output, and select Properties.
2. Specify required properties (see "Ports and polling" on page 107). Your system comes with
two simple schedule profiles, Always on and Always off, which you cannot edit or delete.
If these do not meet your needs, you can create any number of customized schedule
profiles for each camera. You can reuse a customized schedule profile for more than one
purpose if you want to.
3. Save your configuration changes by clicking Save in the yellow notification bar in the
upper-right corner of the Management Application.
Generate alarms based on analytics events
Generating alarms based on analytics events is normally a three-step process:
1. Enable the analytics events feature and set up its security. A list of allowed addresses can
be used to control who can send event data to the system and on which port the server
listens.
2. Create the analytics event, possibly with a description of the event, and test it.
3. Use the analytics event as the source of an alarm definition (see "Alarms definition" on
page 169).
As mentioned, a third-party VCA is most often required for supplying data to your system. Which
VCA tool to use is entirely up to you, as long as the data supplied by the tool adheres to the
applied formatting rules described in the Sony Analytics Events Developers Manual. For more
information, contact Sony.
Test a generic event
If you have added a generic event, a quick and easy way to test your generic event is to first set
up an event notification and then use Telnet to send a small amount of data that triggers the
generic event and the event notification.
Telnet is installed by default on older versions of Windows. For more information, see
https://technet.microsoft.com/en-us/library/cc771275(v=ws.10).aspx.
For this example, we have created a generic event called Video. The generic event specifies that if
the term video appears in a received TCP data package, this should trigger the generic event. Your
generic event may be different, but you can still use these principles:
1. Expand Advanced Configurations, then expand Cameras and Storage Information,
right-click a camera that you have access to in Network Video Management System Smart
Client, and select Properties.
2. Select Event Notification and then the required generic event. Make sure that your
generic event is the only event appearing in the Selected Events list while you are
performing the test, otherwise you cannot be sure that it is your generic event that triggers
the event notification. Once you are done testing, you can move any temporarily removed
events back to the Selected Events list.
Advanced configuration
105
Network Video Management System Standard Edition 2016 R3 - Administrator Manual
3. Save your configuration changes by clicking the Save Configuration button in the
Management Application toolbar.
4. Make sure the Recording Server service is running. Also make sure that the camera that
you configured the event notification for is displayed and that you have camera title bars
enabled in Network Video Management System Smart Client, so you can see the yellow
event indicator.
5. Run Telnet and type the following in the
6. In Windows' Start menu, select Run, and type the following in the Open field:
•
If you are performing the test on the system server itself: telnet localhost 1234
•
If you are performing the test from a remote computer: Substitute localhost with
the IP address of your system's server. Example: If the IP address of the
surveillance system server is 123.123.123.123, type: telnet 123.123.123.123
1234
This opens a Telnet window.
In the above examples, the number 1234 indicates the port on which the system server
listens for generic events. Port 1234 is the default port for this purpose, but you can change
this by specifying another port number as part of the general event handling configuration
(see "Configure general event handling" on page 105). If you have changed the alert and
generic event port number on your system, type your system's alert and generic event port
number instead of 1234.
7. In the Telnet window, type the terms (event substring) required to trigger your generic
event. In our case, a single term, video, is required:
While you type in the Telnet window, you may experience an echo. This is the server
repeating some or all of the characters it receives. It does not have any impact as long as
you are sure you type the relevant characters.
8. Close the Telnet window . You must close the window, since your input is not sent to the
surveillance system until you close the window.
9. Go to Network Video Management System Smart Client. If the yellow event indicator lights
up for the relevant camera, your generic event works as intended.
Important: You can enter up to 128 characters for your generic event. The system disregards any
extra characters you may enter once you have passed 128 characters.
Advanced configuration
106
Network Video Management System Standard Edition 2016 R3 - Administrator Manual
General event properties
Ports and polling
In the General Event Properties window you can specify network settings to be used in
connection with event handling.
Alert and generic event port
Specify port number to use for handling events. Default port is
port 1234.
SMTP event port
Specify the port number to use for sending event information
from hardware devices to the system via SMTP. The default port
is port 25.
FTP event port
The port to use for FTP communication with the hardware device.
The default port is port 21.
For a small number of hardware devices, primarily dedicated
input/output devices (see "About dedicated input/output devices"
on page 55), the system must regularly check the state of the
hardware devices' input ports in order to detect input. Such state
checking at regular intervals is called polling.
Polling interval [1/10]
second
You can specify (in tenths of a second) the interval between state
checks. Default value is 10 tenths of a second (that is one
second). For dedicated input/output devices, it is highly
recommended that the polling frequency is set to the lowest
possible value (one tenth of a second between state checks).
For information about which hardware devices require polling, see
the release notes.
Events and output properties
Test an analytics event
After you create an analytics event, you can test the requirements (see "Test Analytics Event
(properties)" on page 108), for example that the analytics events feature has been enabled in
Management Application.
1. Select an existing analytics event.
2. In the properties, click the Test Event button. A window appears that shows all the
possible sources of events.
Select the source of your test event, for example a camera. The window is closed and a
new window appears that goes through four conditions that must be fulfilled for the
analytics event to work.
As an additional test, in Network Video Management System Smart Client you can verify that the
analytics event was sent to the event server. To do this, open Network Video Management System
Smart Client and view the event in the Alarm Manager tab.
See also
About analytics events
Advanced configuration
107
Network Video Management System Standard Edition 2016 R3 - Administrator Manual
Test Analytics Event (properties)
When you test the requirements of an analytics event, a window appears that checks four
conditions and provides possible error descriptions and solutions.
Condition
Description
Error messages and solutions
Changes saved
If the event is new, is it saved? Or if
there are changes to the event
name, are these changes saved?
Save changes before testing
analytics event.
Solution/Explanation: Save changes.
Is the Analytics Event feature
enabled?
Analytics events have not been
enabled. Solution/Explanation: Enable
the Analytics Events feature. To do
this, click Tools > Options >
Analytics Events and select the
Enabled check box.
Analytics Events
enabled
Address allowed
Send analytics
event
The local host name must be
added as allowed address for the
Analytics Event service.
Solution/Explanation: Add your
machine to the analytics events
address list of allowed IP addresses or
host names.
Is the IP address/host name of the
machine sending the event(s)
allowed (listed on the analytics
events address list)?
Error resolving the local host
name. Solution/Explanation: The IP
address or host name of the machine
cannot be found or is invalid.
Did sending a test event to the
Event Server succeed?
Each step is marked by either failed:
or successful:
See table below.
.
Error messages and solutions for the condition Send analytics event:
Event server not found
Unable to find the event server on the list of registered services.
Error connecting to event
server
Unable to connect to the event server on the stated port. The
error occurs most likely because of network problems, or the
event server service has stopped.
Error sending analytics
event
The connection to the event server is established, but the event
cannot be sent. The error most likely occurs because of network
problems, for example a time out.
Error receiving response
from event server
Analytics event unknown by
event server
Advanced configuration
The event has been sent to the event server, but no reply
received. The error most likely occurs because of network
problems or a port that is busy.
See the event server log, typically located at ProgramData\Sony\Network VMS Event Server\logs\.
The event server service does not know the event. The error
most likely occurs because the event or changes to the event
have not been saved.
108
Network Video Management System Standard Edition 2016 R3 - Administrator Manual
Invalid analytics event
received by event server
The event format is incorrect.
Sender unauthorized by
event server
Most likely your machine is not on the list of allowed IP addresses
or hostnames.
Internal error in event
server.
Invalid response received
from Event server
Unknown response from
event server
Unexpected error
Event server error.
See the event server log, typically located at ProgramData\Sony\Network VMS Event Server\logs\.
The response is invalid. Possibly the port is busy or there are
network problems.
See the event server log, typically located at ProgramData\Sony\Network VMS Event Server\logs\.
The response is valid, but not understood. The error occurs
possibly because of network problems, or the port is busy.
See the event server log, typically located at ProgramData\Sony\Network VMS Event Server\logs\.
Please contact Sony support for help.
Hardware input event
When you add hardware input events (see "Add a hardware input event" on page 102), properties
may depend on the selected type of input:
Enable
Event name
Images from camera
Select the check box to use selected type of input as an event in
the system, and specify further properties.
Specify a name. Names must be unique, and must not contain
any of these special characters: <
> & ' " \ / : * ? | [ ]
Some cameras only support event names of a certain length
and/or with a certain structure. Refer to the camera's
documentation for exact details.
Only relevant if you use pre- and post-alarm images in your
system. This functionality is only available for selected cameras
and enables the sending of images from immediately before an
event took place from the camera to the surveillance system via
email.
Note pre- and post-alarm images are not the same as the preand post-recording feature (see "Recording" on page 85)
particular to your system.
Number of pre-alarm
images
Advanced configuration
Specify the relevant number of pre-alarm images. The allowed
number of images may differ from camera to camera. The
allowed range is shown to the right of the field.
This is only relevant if you are using pre-alarm images which is a
feature that is available for selected cameras only.
109
Network Video Management System Standard Edition 2016 R3 - Administrator Manual
Frames per second
Only relevant if using pre-alarm images, a feature available for
selected cameras only. Specify required frame rate. Used in
combination with the Number of pre-alarm images field, this field
indirectly allows you to control how long before the event you
want to receive pre-alarm images from.
Send e-mail if this event
occurs
Only available if email notifications (see "Configure email
notifications" on page 130) are enabled. Select if the system
should automatically send an email when the event occurs.
Recipients are defined as part of the email notification
configuration. When using email notifications, remember the
individual cameras' scheduling.
Attach image from camera
Only available if e-mail notification (see "Configure email
notifications" on page 130) is enabled. Select to include an
image, recorded at the time the event is triggered, in the e-mail
notification, then select the relevant camera in the list next to the
check box.
Delete
Delete a selected event.
Add
When a specific hardware input event is selected, clicking Add
adds a timer event (see "Add a timer event" on page 104) to the
selected hardware input event.
Send SMS if this event
occurs
Select if the system should automatically send an SMS when the
event occurs. You define the recipients of the SMS notifications as
part of the SMS notification configuration. When you use SMS
notifications, remember that you may have set individual camera
scheduling.
The setting is only available if you have enabled SMS
notifications.
Hardware output
When you add hardware output (see "Add a hardware output" on page 102), specify the following
properties:
Specify a name.
If you are going to make the hardware output available for
manual activation in clients, this is the name that client users will
see.
Output name
Names must be unique, and must not contain any of these special
characters: < > & ' " \ / : * ? | [ ]
Some cameras only support event names of a certain length
and/or with a certain structure. See the documentation for the
relevant camera for exact information.
Output connected to
Advanced configuration
Select which of the hardware device's output ports the output is
connected to. Many hardware devices only have a single output
port; in that case simply select Output 1.
110
Network Video Management System Standard Edition 2016 R3 - Administrator Manual
Specify the amount of time for which the output should be
applied. Specify the relevant amount of time in either 1/10
seconds or seconds.
Keep output for
Some hardware devices are only able to apply output for a
relatively short time, for example for up to five seconds. See the
documentation for the relevant hardware device for exact
information.
To verify that your hardware output works, click the Test Output button.
Manual event
When you add manual events (see "Add a manual event" on page 103), specify the following
properties:
[List of defined global
events and cameras]
Event name
Contains a Global node and a list of all defined cameras. You can
configure as many manual events as required, no matter whether
they are global or camera-specific. A + sign next to the Global
node indicates that one or more global manual events have
already been configured. A + sign next to a camera indicates that
one or more manual events have already been configured for that
camera.
Specify a name. Names must be unique, and must not contain
any of these special characters: <
> & ' " \ / : * ? | [ ]
Some cameras only support event names of a certain length
and/or with a certain structure. Refer to the camera's
documentation for exact details.
Send e-mail if this event
occurs
Only available if email notifications (see "Configure email
notifications" on page 130) are enabled. Select if the system
should automatically send an email when the event occurs.
Recipients are defined as part of the email notification
configuration. When using email notifications, remember the
individual cameras' scheduling.
Attach image from camera
Only available if e-mail notification (see "Configure email
notifications" on page 130) is enabled. Select to include an
image, recorded at the time the event is triggered, in the e-mail
notification, then select the relevant camera in the list next to the
check box.
Delete
Delete a selected event.
Add
Add a new event. When Global or a specific camera is selected,
clicking Add adds a new manual event. When a specific manual
event is selected, clicking Add adds a timer event (see "Add a
timer event" on page 104) to the selected manual event.
Advanced configuration
111
Network Video Management System Standard Edition 2016 R3 - Administrator Manual
Send SMS if this event
occurs
Select if the system should automatically send an SMS when the
event occurs. You define the recipients of the SMS notifications as
part of the SMS notification configuration. When you use SMS
notifications, remember that you may have set individual camera
scheduling.
The setting is only available if you have enabled SMS
notifications.
Timer event
When you add timer events (see "Add a timer event" on page 104), specify the following
properties:
Timer event name
Timer event occurs after
Specify a name. Names must be unique, and must not contain
any of these special characters: <
> & ' " \ / : * ? | [ ]
Some cameras only support event names of a certain length
and/or with a certain structure. See the camera's documentation
for exact details.
Specify the amount of time that should pass between the main
event occurring and the timer event (in seconds or minutes).
Generic event
When you add generic events (see "Test a generic event" on page 105), specify the following
properties:
Event name
Event port
Advanced configuration
Specify a name. Names must be unique, and must not contain
any of these special characters: <
> & ' " \ / : * ? | [ ]
Some cameras only support event names of a certain length
and/or with a certain structure. Refer to the camera's
documentation for exact details.
Read-only field displaying the port number on which your system
listens for generic events (default is port 1234). You can change
the port number as part of the general event handling
configuration (see "Configure general event handling" on page
105).
112
Network Video Management System Standard Edition 2016 R3 - Administrator Manual
Specify the individual items for which your system should look
out for when analyzing data packages. Specify one or more
terms, then click the Add button to add the specified term(s) to
the Event message expression field, the content of which is used
for the actual analysis. Examples:
Event substring
•
Single term: User001 (when added to the Event message
expression field, the term appears as "User001")
•
Several terms as one item: User001 Door053 Sunday
(when added to the Event message expression field, the
terms appears as " User001 Door053 Sunday")
When you add several terms as one item (appearing as, for
example, " User001 Door053 Sunday" in the Event message
expression field), everything between the quotation marks must
appear together in the package, in the specified sequence, in
order to match your criterion. If the terms must appear in the
package, but not necessarily in any exact sequence, add the
terms one by one (they appear as "User001" "Door053" "Sunday"
in the Event message expression field).
TCP and UDP packages used for generic events can contain
special characters such as @, #, +, 㪠~ and more within the text
string to be analyzed.
Advanced configuration
113
Network Video Management System Standard Edition 2016 R3 - Administrator Manual
Displays the string which will be used for the actual package
analysis. The field is not directly editable. However, you can
position the cursor inside the field in order to determine where a
new item should be included when you click the Add button or
one of the parenthesis or operator buttons described in the
following. Likewise, you can position the cursor inside the field in
order to determine where an item should be removed when
clicking the Remove button: The item immediately to the left of
the cursor will be removed when you click the Remove button.
•
(: Lets you add a start parenthesis character to the Event
message expression field. Parentheses can be used to ensure
that related terms are processed together as a logical unit; in
other words, they can be used to force a certain processing
order in the analysis. Example: If using ("User001" OR
"Door053") AND "Sunday", the two terms inside the
parenthesis will be processed first, then the result will be
combined with the last part of the string. In other words, the
system first looks for any packages containing either of the
terms User001 or Door053, then it takes the results and run
through them in order to see which packages also contain the
term Sunday.
•
): Lets you add an end parenthesis character to the Event
message expression field.
•
AND: Lets you add an AND operator to the Event message
expression field. With an AND operator, you specify that the
terms on both sides of the AND operator must be present.
Example: If using User001 AND Door053 AND Sunday, the
term User001 as well as the term Door053 as well as the
term Sunday must be present in order for the criterion to be
met. It is not enough for only one or two of the terms to be
present. As a rule of thumb, the more terms you combine
with AND, the fewer results you retrieve:
•
OR: Lets you add an OR operator to the Event message
expression field. With an OR operator, you specify that either
one or another term must be present. Example: If using
User001 OR Door053 OR Sunday, the term User001 or the
term Door053 or the term Sunday must be present in order
for the criterion to be met. The criterion is satisfied even if
only one of the terms is present. As a rule of thumb, the more
terms you combine with OR, the more results you will
retrieve:
•
Remove: Lets you remove the item immediately to the left of
a cursor positioned in the Event message expression field. If
you have not positioned the cursor in the Event message
expression field, the last item in the field will be removed.
Event message expression
Advanced configuration
114
Network Video Management System Standard Edition 2016 R3 - Administrator Manual
Event priority
The same data package may be analyzed for different events. The
ability to assign a priority to each event lets you manage which
event should be triggered if a received package matches the
criteria for several events. The priority must be specified as a
number between 0 (lowest priority) and 1000 (highest priority).
When the system receives a TCP and/or UDP package, analysis of
the packet starts with analysis for the event with the highest
priority. This way, when a package matches the criteria for
several events, only the event with the highest priority will be
triggered. If a package matches the criteria for several events
with an identical priority, for example two events with a priority
of 999, all events with the priority in question are triggered.
Select which protocol the system should listen for in order to
detect the event:
•
Any: Listen for/analyze packages using TCP as well as UDP
protocol.
•
TCP: Listen for/analyze packages using TCP protocol only.
•
UDP: Listen for/analyze packages using UDP protocol only.
Event protocol
Select how particular your system should be when analyzing
received data packages:
•
Search: In order for the event to occur, the received package
must contain the message specified in the Event message
expression field, but may also have more content.
Example: If you have specified that the received package
should contain the terms "User001" and "Door053", the event
is triggered if the received package contains the terms
"User001" and "Door053" and "Sunday" since your two
required terms are contained in the received package.
•
Match: In order for the event to occur, the received package
must contain exactly the message specified in the Event
message expression field, and nothing else.
Event rule type
Send e-mail if this event
occurs
Only available if email notifications (see "Configure email
notifications" on page 130) are enabled. Select if the system
should automatically send an email when the event occurs.
Recipients are defined as part of the email notification
configuration. When using email notifications, remember the
individual cameras' scheduling.
Attach image from camera
Only available if e-mail notification (see "Configure email
notifications" on page 130) is enabled. Select to include an
image, recorded at the time the event is triggered, in the e-mail
notification, then select the relevant camera in the list next to the
check box.
Send SMS if this event
occurs
Select if the system should automatically send an SMS when the
event occurs. You define the recipients of the SMS notifications as
part of the SMS notification configuration. When you use SMS
notifications, remember that you may have set individual camera
scheduling.
The setting is only available if you have enabled SMS
notifications.
Advanced configuration
115
Network Video Management System Standard Edition 2016 R3 - Administrator Manual
Delete
Delete a selected event.
Add
Add a new event. When the Generic Events node is selected,
clicking Add will add a new generic event. When a specific
generic event is selected, clicking Add will add a timer event (on
page 104) to the selected generic event.
Output control on event (Events and Output-specific
properties)
When you add output controls on events (see "Configure hardware output on event" on page 104),
specify the following properties:
Event
Select the required event.
Output
Select the relevant output event.
Scheduling and archiving
About scheduling
The scheduling feature lets you specify:
•
When you want to archive
•
That some cameras transfer video to your system at all times
•
That some cameras transfer video only within specific periods of time or when specific
events occur
•
When you want to receive notifications from the system
You can set up general scheduling properties for all your cameras or individual properties per
camera. You can set up when:
•
One or more cameras should be online and transfer video to your system.
•
One of more cameras should use speedup and use a higher than normal frame rate.
•
You want to receive any notifications regarding one or more cameras.
•
Archiving takes place.
•
PTZ cameras should patrol, and according to which patrolling profile.
About archiving
Archiving is an integrated and automated feature with which recordings are moved to free up space
for new recordings. By default, recordings are stored in the database for each camera. The
database for each camera can contain a maximum of 600,000 records or 40 GB. Your system
automatically archives recordings if a camera's database becomes full. Consequently, having
sufficient archiving space is important.
Advanced configuration
116
Network Video Management System Standard Edition 2016 R3 - Administrator Manual
You do not have to do anything to enable archiving. Archiving runs in the background and is
automatically enabled and carried out from the moment your system is installed. The most recent
recordings are saved on a local storage in order to prevent network-related problems in the saving
process.
The default settings for your system is to perform archiving once a day, or if your database
becomes full. You can change the settings for when and how often archiving takes place in the
Management Application. You can also schedule archiving up to 24 times a day, with a minimum of
one hour between each one. This way, you can pro-actively archive recordings, so databases never
become full. The more you expect to record, the more often you should archive.
You can also change the retention time, which is the total amount of time you want to keep
recordings from a camera (recordings in the camera's database as well as any archived recordings)
under the properties of the individual camera.
Your system automatically archives recordings if a camera's database becomes full. You only
specify one time limit (the retention time) as part of the general Recording and Archiving paths
properties. Note that retention time determines when archiving takes place. Retention time is the
total amount of time for which you want to keep recordings from a camera (that is recordings in
the camera's database as well as any archived recordings).
Backup of archives
Sony does not recommend that you create backups based on the content of camera databases as it
may cause sharing violations or other malfunctions. Instead, create backups based on the content
of archives. If you have not specified separate archiving locations for separate cameras, you could
back up the default local archiving directory, Archives.
Important: When you schedule a backup, make sure the backup job does not overlap with any
scheduled archiving times.
If archiving fails
Under rare circumstances, archiving may fail, for example due to network problems. However, this
does not pose a threat in your system. The system creates a new database and continues archiving
in this new database. You can work with and view both this new database and the old one like any
other databases.
About archiving locations
The default archiving folder (see "Default File Paths" on page 176) (C:\MediaDatabase) is located
on the system server. You can change the default archiving folder to any other location locally. In
the archiving folder, separate subfolders for storing archives for each camera are automatically
created. These subfolders are named after the MAC address of the hardware device to which the
camera is connected.
Because you can keep archives spanning many days of recordings and archiving may take place
several times per day, further subfolders, named with the archiving date and time, are also
automatically created.
The subfolders are named according to the following structure:
...\Archives\CameraMACAddress_VideoEncoderChannel\DateAndTime
If the video encoder does not have several channels, the video encoder channel will always be _1
(example: 00408c51e181_1).
Example: an archiving at 23.15 on 31st December 2012 for a camera with the MAC address
00408c51e181 attached to channel 2 would be stored:
C:\MediaDatabase\Archives\00408c51e181_2\2012-12-31-23-15
Advanced configuration
117
Network Video Management System Standard Edition 2016 R3 - Administrator Manual
About dynamic archive paths
With dynamic archiving paths, you specify a number of different archiving paths, usually across
several drives. Sony recommends using dynamic paths (see "Configure storage wizard" on page
42), which also is the default setting when you configure cameras through the Configure video &
recording wizard.
If the path containing the camera's database is on one of the drives you have selected for dynamic
archiving, your system always tries to archive to that drive first. If not, your system automatically
archives to the archiving drive with the most available space at any time, provided a camera
database is not using that drive.
The drive that has the most available space may change during the archiving process, and
archiving may happen to several archiving drives during the same process. This does not have
impact on how users find and view archived recordings.
Dynamic archiving paths are general for all your cameras. You cannot configure dynamic archiving
paths for individual cameras.
When deciding which drives to use for dynamic archiving, consider the pros and cons in the
following examples (in which we assume that the default archiving path is on drive C:—drive letters
are examples only, different drive letters may of course be used in your organization):
•
Camera records to drive C: and archives to drive C:
If the path containing the camera's database is on one of the drives you have selected for
dynamic archiving, your system tries to archive to that drive first. Archiving takes place
quickly, but may also fill up the drive with data fairly quickly.
•
Camera records to drive C: and archives to drive D:
Recordings and archives are on separate drives. Archiving takes place less quickly. Your
system will first temporarily store the archive in the local default archiving directory on C:,
then immediately move the archive to the archiving location on D:. Therefore, you need
sufficient space to accommodate the temporary archive on C:.
•
Camera 1 records to drive C: and archives to drive D: while Camera 2 records to
drive D: and archives to drive C:
Avoid this. One camera's archiving may take up space required for another camera's
recordings. In the above example, Camera 1's archiving to D: may result in no recording
space for camera 2 on D:. The rule is: "Do not cross recording and archiving drives."
If you use several surveillance servers in a master/slave setup, each surveillance server must
archive to its own mapped location in order for archiving to work. If you attempt to archive to the
same mapped location for all the servers, archiving fails.
About archiving audio
If you have enabled an audio source (for example, a microphone) on a hardware device, audio
recordings are archived together with video recordings from the camera attached to the hardware
device. If the hardware device is a video encoder with several channels, audio is archived with the
camera on channel 1. When you have enabled an audio source, the system records audio to the
associated camera’s database. This affects the database’s capacity for storing video. You may,
therefore, want to use scheduled archiving more frequently if you record audio and video than if
you only record video.
Advanced configuration
118
Network Video Management System Standard Edition 2016 R3 - Administrator Manual
Storage capacity required for archiving
The storage capacity required for archiving depends entirely on the amount of recordings you plan
to keep, and on how long you want to keep them (retention time). Some organizations want to
keep archived recordings from a large number of cameras for several months or years. Other
organizations may only want to archive recordings from one or two cameras, and they may want to
keep their archives for much shorter periods of time.
You should always first consider the storage capacity of the local drive containing the default
archiving directory to which archived recordings are always moved, even though they may
immediately after be moved to an archiving location on another drive. Basically, the capacity of the
local drive should be at least twice the size required for storing the databases of all cameras.
When you archive, the system automatically checks that space required for the data to be archived
plus 1 GB of free disk space per camera is available at the archiving location. If not, the archive
location's oldest data from the relevant camera is deleted until there is sufficient free space for the
new data to be archived.
When you estimate storage capacity required for archiving, consider your organization's needs,
then plan for worst case rather than best case scenarios.
About archiving schedules
There are two ways in which to configure archiving schedules:
•
While you configure your cameras through the Configure Video and Recording wizard (see
"Configure storage wizard" on page 42), in which case you configure your archiving
schedule on the wizard's Drive selection page.
•
As part of the general Scheduling and Archiving properties: Expand Advanced
Configuration, right-click Scheduling and Archiving, select Properties, select
Archiving in the dialog, and specify relevant properties (see "Archiving" on page 124).
Automatic response if running out of disk space
If your system runs of disk space while archiving, you can set up an automatic response. Two
scenarios can occur, depending on whether the camera database drive is different from, or
identical to, the archiving drive:
Same drive: Automatic moving or deletion of archives if drive runs out of
disk space
If your system server is running out of disk space, and the archiving drive is identical to the
camera database drive, your system automatically does a number of attempts to free up space.
Most of these attempts will result in the loss of your data from archives or databases.
•
First, the system attempts to move archives. You can only move archives if you use
dynamic archiving, with which you can archive to several different drives. This happens if:
•
there is less than 15% disk space left, and the available disk space goes below 40
GB plus 2 GB per camera
- or •
the available disk space goes below 225 MB plus 30 MB per camera. Example: with
ten cameras, the server would be running out of disk space if the remaining
available disk space went below 525 MB (225 MB plus 30 MB for each of the ten
cameras).
Advanced configuration
119
Network Video Management System Standard Edition 2016 R3 - Administrator Manual
The difference ensures that very large disks are not necessarily considered to be running
out of disk space just because they have less than 15% disk space left.
•
If the system cannot move archives, your system attempts to delete the oldest archives.
This happens if:
•
there is less than 10% disk space left, and the available disk space goes below 30
GB plus 1.5 GB per camera
- or •
the available disk space goes below 150 MB plus 20 MB per camera (example: with
ten cameras, the server would be running out of disk space if the remaining
available disk space went below 350 MB (150 MB plus 20 MB for each of the ten
cameras))
The difference ensures that very large disks not necessarily are considered to be running
out of disk space just because they have less than 10% disk space left.
•
If there are no archives to delete, your system attempts to resize camera databases by
deleting their oldest recordings. This happens if:
•
there is less than 5% disk space left, and the available disk space goes below 20 GB
plus 1 GB per camera
- or •
the available disk space goes below 75 MB plus 10 MB per camera (example: with
ten cameras, the server would be running out of disk space if the remaining
available disk space went below 175 MB (75 MB plus 10 MB for each of the ten
cameras))
The difference ensures that very large disks will not necessarily be considered to be running
out of disk space just because they have less than 5% disk space left.
When the system restarts your recording server after resizing the database, the original databases
sizes are used, so you should make sure that the drive size problem is solved or, alternatively,
adjust camera database sizes to reflect the altered drive size.
If the system performs the database resizing procedure, you are informed on-screen in Network
Video Management System Smart Client, in log files, and or in notifications (if set up).
Different drives: Automatic archiving if database drive runs out of disk
space
In case the system server is running out of disk space, and the archiving drive is different from
the camera database drive, and archiving has not taken place within the last hour, archiving
automatically begins in an attempt to free up disk space. This will happen regardless of any
archiving schedules. The server is considered to be running out of disk space if:
•
there is less than 10% disk space left, and the available disk space goes below 30 GB plus
1.5 GB per camera
•
the available disk space goes below 150 MB plus 20 MB per camera. Example: with ten
cameras, the server would be running out of disk space if the remaining available disk
space went below 350 MB (150 MB plus 20 MB for each of the ten cameras).
The difference ensures that very large disks are not necessarily considered to be running out of
disk space just because they have less than 10% disk space left.
Advanced configuration
120
Network Video Management System Standard Edition 2016 R3 - Administrator Manual
On the archiving drive, the system automatically checks that the space required for data from a
camera to be archived plus 1 GB of free disk space per camera is available. If not, the archive
drive's oldest data from the relevant camera is deleted until there is sufficient free space for the
new data to be archived.
About viewing archived recordings
You can view archived recordings via Network Video Management System Smart Client. You can,
for example, use features such as exporting and browsing with archived recordings.
For archived recordings, you can use Network Video Management System Smart Client's playback
features to find and view the relevant recordings, similar to recordings stored in a camera's regular
database. You can also use exported archives, archives stored outside local drives, in Network
Video Management System Smart Client. For more information, see the Network Video
Management System Smart Client documentation on the Sony website for downloading manuals
and guides http://www.sony.net/CameraSystem/NVMS/Manuals.
Configure general scheduling and archiving
To configure general scheduling and archiving, do the following:
1. Expand Advanced Configuration, right-click Scheduling and Archiving > Properties.
2. Specify properties as required for Scheduling all cameras (on page 121), Scheduling
options (on page 123), and Archiving (on page 124).
3. Your system comes with two simple schedule profiles, Always on and Always off, which
you cannot edit or delete. If these do not meet your needs, you can create any number of
customized schedule profiles for each camera. You can reuse a customized schedule profile
for more than one purpose if you want to.
4. Save your configuration changes by clicking Save in the yellow notification bar in the
upper-right corner of the Management Application.
When archiving, disable any virus scanning (see "About virus scanning" on page 12) of
camera databases and archiving locations.
General scheduling properties
Scheduling all cameras
When you configure general scheduling and archiving (see "Configure general scheduling and
archiving" on page 121), you can specify certain properties for many cameras in one go. Either in
order to speed up things, or because the relevant properties are shared by all cameras rather than
being specific to individual cameras.
Note that you can specify the properties for Online Period, Speedup, Notifications (Email and
SMS), and PTZ Patrolling individually for each camera.
Advanced configuration
121
Network Video Management System Standard Edition 2016 R3 - Administrator Manual
The template can help you set similar properties for cameras and
reduce the time you need to spend on changing settings if you
have multiple cameras connected to your system.
Template
Example: You have 20 cameras and want to change the recording
path, archiving path, and retention time for all cameras. You can
enter the settings you want to use once and then apply the
template to the 20 cameras to make all cameras have the same
settings.
Apply Template
Select which cameras you want to apply the template for. Use
one of the two Set buttons to apply the template.
Camera
The name as it appears in the Management Application as well as
in clients.
Select the required profile (for example Always on) for the
online schedule (see "Configure camera-specific schedules" on
page 63) for the relevant camera(s).
Specify a camera's online periods by creating schedule profiles
based on:
•
Periods of time (example: Mondays from 08.30 until 17.45),
shown in pink:
•
Events within periods of time (example: from Event A occurs
until Event B occurs Mondays from 08.30 until 17.45), shown
in yellow:
Online
You can combine the two options
overlap in time.
, but they cannot
Select the relevant profile for the e-mail notification schedule for
the relevant camera(s).
E-mail
Specify a camera's e-mail notification periods by creating
schedule profiles based on periods of time.
Example: Mondays from 08.30 until 17.45, shown in blue:
Select All
Click the button to select all cameras in the Apply Template
column.
Clear All
Click the button to clear all selections in the Apply Template
column.
Set selected template value
on selected cameras
Apply only a selected value from the template to selected
cameras.
New schedule profile
Create a new schedule profile of any type by clicking the
Create... button.
Select the required profile for the SMS notification schedule for
the relevant camera(s).
SMS
Specify a camera's SMS notification periods by creating schedule
profiles based on periods of time.
Example: Mondays from 08.30 until 17.45, shown in green:
Advanced configuration
122
Network Video Management System Standard Edition 2016 R3 - Administrator Manual
Only available for PTZ cameras with patrolling, the continuous
movement of a PTZ camera between a number of preset
positions.
PTZ Patrolling
Select the required profile for the PTZ patrolling schedule (see
"PTZ patrolling" on page 125) for the relevant camera(s).
Specify a camera's patrolling schedule based on patrolling profiles
within particular periods of time (example: Mondays from 08.30
until 17.45), shown in red:
Scheduling options
When you configure general scheduling and archiving (see "Configure general scheduling and
archiving" on page 121), you can specify certain properties for many cameras in one go. In the
case of Scheduling Options, it is because the properties are shared by all cameras.
Cameras may be offline, for example because they have reached
the end of an online recording schedule (see "Online period" on
page 124), in which case client users cannot view live video from
the cameras.
Start cameras on client
requests
If you select Start cameras on client requests, client users can
view live video from the camera outside online schedule, but
without recording. This technically means to force the camera to
be online outside its online schedule.
You must select Enable recording when started on client
request (see the following), if you want recording to take place.
Enable recording on the camera when Start cameras on client
requests (see the previous) is also selected.
Enable recording when
started on client request
Schedule profile for new
cameras
Maximum delay between
reconnect attempts
If a user does not have access to manual recording (see "Camera
access" on page 143), selecting Enable recording when
started on client request, does not enable the user to do
manual recording.
Select which online schedule profile to use as default for cameras
you later add to your system. Note that your selection only
applies for the online schedule, not for any other schedules. The
default selection is Always on, meaning that new cameras are
always online, transferring video to the system server for live
viewing and further processing.
Control the aggressiveness of reconnection attempts. If your
system loses the connection to a camera, it by default attempts
to re-establish the connection after ten seconds.
In some environments, for example if using vehicle-mounted
cameras through wireless connections, camera connections may
frequently be lost, and you may want to change the
aggressiveness of such reconnection attempts.
You can view live and even record video from a camera outside its online recording schedule. To do
this, you select the Start cameras on client requests and, if needed, the Enable recording
when started on client request options in the following when setting up your scheduling
properties for the camera in question.
Advanced configuration
123
Network Video Management System Standard Edition 2016 R3 - Administrator Manual
Archiving
To control when your system archives and how the system should respond in the event of failure,
set the following settings. Your system automatically archives (see "About archiving" on page 116)
recordings if a camera's database becomes full.
Archiving Times
Specify when you want your system to automatically move
recordings to your archiving path(s). You can specify up to 24
archiving times per day, with minimum one hour between each
one. Select the hour, minute and second values and click the up
and down buttons to increase or decrease values, or simply
overwrite the selected value, and then click Add. The more you
expect to record, the more often you should archive.
Send email on archiving
failure
Your system automatically sends an email to selected recipients if
archiving fails if you enable this. You must also enable the email
notification feature. Recipients are defined as part of the email
notification properties (see "Email (Properties)" on page 130).
Send SMS on archiving
failure
Archive on event
Select if the system should automatically send an SMS if
archiving fails. You define the recipients of the SMS notifications
as part of the SMS notification configuration.
The setting is only available if you have enabled SMS
notifications.
If selected, your system starts archiving when a certain event
occurs. Select the event from the list.
Camera-specific scheduling properties
Online period
When you configure scheduling (see "Configure camera-specific schedules" on page 63) for specific
cameras, you can specify the following:
Select the required profile (for example Always on) for the
online schedule (see "Configure camera-specific schedules" on
page 63) for the relevant camera(s).
You specify a camera's online periods by creating schedule
profiles based on:
Online
•
Periods of time (example: Mondays from 08.30 until 17.45),
shown in pink:
•
Events within periods of time (example: from Event A occurs
until Event B occurs Mondays from 08.30 until 17.45), shown
in yellow:
The two options can be combined
cannot overlap in time.
, but they
For many users, the Online Period settings may be the most important scheduling settings to set,
since the scheduling settings determine when each camera should transfer video to the system.
Advanced configuration
124
Network Video Management System Standard Edition 2016 R3 - Administrator Manual
Cameras added to the system are automatically online by default, and you only need to modify the
online period settings if you want cameras to be online only at specific times or events. You can
change this default setting as part of the general scheduling options (see "Scheduling options" on
page 123), in which case cameras added at a later time are not automatically online.
The fact that a camera transfers video to the system does not necessarily mean that video from
the camera is recorded. You configure recording separately. See Configure video and recording
(see "About video and recording configuration" on page 61).
If you want to view live video as well as record video from a camera outside its online recording
schedule, select the Start cameras on client requests (see "Scheduling options" on page 123) and
the Enable recording when started on client request (see "Scheduling options" on page 123)
options to set up your scheduling properties for a relevant camera.
Speedup
Specify speedup periods for specific MJPEG cameras. Before you can define this type of schedule,
you must enable (see "Frame rate - MJPEG" on page 75) speedup.
Speedup
Specify a camera's speedup periods by creating schedule profiles
based on periods of time (example: Mondays from 08.30 until
17.45), shown in olive green:
Speedup may also take place based on events, but you configure this elsewhere. See Frame rate MJPEG (General recording and storage properties) (see "Frame rate - MJPEG" on page 75) and
Video (Camera-specific properties) (see "Video" on page 82).
PTZ patrolling
When you configure scheduling (see "Configure camera-specific schedules" on page 63) for PTZ
(pan-tilt-zoom) cameras capable of patrolling (see "PTZ patrolling (properties)" on page 94), you
can specify which patrolling profiles to use at specific times. Before you can define this type of
schedule, you must configure patrolling for the relevant cameras.
Only available for PTZ cameras that have PTZ patrolling
capabilities.
PTZ Patrolling
Select the required profile for the PTZ patrolling schedule (see
"PTZ patrolling" on page 125) for the camera(s) in question.
Specify a camera's patrolling schedule based on patrolling profiles
within particular periods of time (example: Mondays from 08.30
until 17.45), shown in red:
Use of one patrolling profile may be followed immediately by use of another. Example: use the
Daytime patrolling profile Mondays from 08.30 until 17.45, then the Evening patrolling profile
Mondays from 17.45 until 23.00. Use of two patrolling profiles cannot overlap.
Unlike other types of scheduling, there are no ready-made Always on and Always off schedule
profiles for PTZ patrolling. You can create any number of customized schedule profiles for each
camera. When you create a customized schedule profile (see "Configure camera-specific schedules"
on page 63) for one camera, you can reuse it with other cameras if required.
Advanced configuration
125
Network Video Management System Standard Edition 2016 R3 - Administrator Manual
Logs
About logs
Your system can generate various logs that shows the activity on system functionality. The
following log types are available in your system:
Name
Description
Shows Management Application activity. The system creates a
new log file for every day you use the Management Application.
Management Application log
You cannot disable this type of logging. Management Application
files
log files are named according to the structure
AdminYYYYMMDD.log, for example Admin20091231.log.
Shows Recording Server service activity. A new log file is created
for each day this service is used.
Recording Server service log You cannot disable this type of logging. Recording Server service
files
log files are named according to the structure
RecordingServerYYYYMMDD.log, for example
RecordingServer20091231.log.
Image Server service log
files
Shows Image Server service activity. A new log file is created for
each day the service is used.
You cannot disable this type of logging. Image Server service log
files are named according to the structure ISLog_YYYYMMDD.log,
for example ISLog_20091231.log.
Shows Image Import service activity, when this service is used
for fetching pre-alarm images, and storing the fetched images in
camera databases.
Image Import service log
files
Pre-alarm images is a feature available for selected cameras only.
It enables sending of images from immediately before an event
took place from the camera to the surveillance system via e-mail.
A new log file is created for each day the service is used.
You cannot disable this type of logging. Image Import service log
files are named according to the structure
ImageImportLog_YYYMMDD.log, for example
ImageImportLog20091231.log.
Shows registered events' activity. A new log file is created for
each day on which events occur.
Event log files
You cannot disable this type of logging. Event log files should be
viewed using Network Video Management System Smart Client
(use the Playback tab's Alerts section).
Shows Network Video Management System Smart Client user
activity (if audit logging is enabled).
Audit log files
Advanced configuration
A new log file is created for each day with audit logging enabled
and client user activity. Audit log files are named according to the
structure is_auditYYYMMDD.log, for example
is_audit20091231.log. The _is prefix is due to the fact that the
audit log files are generated by the Image Server service.
126
Network Video Management System Standard Edition 2016 R3 - Administrator Manual
Log locations
All log files are by default placed in the appropriate All Users folder for the operating system you
are using. By default, they are stored there for seven days. Note that you can change log file
locations as well as the number of days to store the logs when you configure logging.
Log structures
Most log files generated by your system use a shared structure complying with the W3C Extended
Log File Format. Each log file consists of a header and a number of log lines:
•
The header outlines the information contained in the log lines.
•
The log lines consist of two main parts: the log information itself as well as an encrypted
part. The encrypted part makes it possible, through decryption and comparison, to assert
that a log file has not been tampered with.
Log integrity checks
All log files, except Management Application log files, are subjected to an integrity check once
every 24 hours. The integrity check is performed by your system's Log Check service. The result of
the integrity check is automatically written to a file named according to the structure
LogCheck_YYYYMMDD.log, for example LogCheck_20091231.log. Like the log files themselves, the
log check files are by default placed in the appropriate All Users folder for the operating system
you are using.
Any inconsistencies are reported in the form of error messages written in the log check file.
Possible error messages:
Name
Description
Log integrity information
was not found. Log integrity The log file could not be checked for integrity.
can't be guaranteed.
Log information does not
match integrity information. The log file exists, but does not contain the expected information.
Log integrity can't be
Log integrity cannot be guaranteed.
guaranteed.
[Log file name] not found
The log file was not present.
[Log file name] is empty
The log file was present, but empty.
Last line changed/removed
in [log file name]
The last line of the log file did not match the validation criteria.
Encrypted data missing in
The encrypted part of the relevant log line was not present.
[log file name] near line [#]
Advanced configuration
127
Network Video Management System Standard Edition 2016 R3 - Administrator Manual
Name
Description
Inconsistency found in [log
file name] near line [#]
The log line does not match the encrypted part.
Inconsistency found in [log
file name] at beginning of
log file
The log file header is not correct. This situation is most likely to
occur if a user has attempted to delete the beginning of a log file.
Note: Other messages that are not error-related may also appear in the log check file.
Configure system, event and audit logging
Your system can generate various logs. To configure logging, do the following:
1. Expand Advanced Configuration, right-click Logs and select Properties.
2. Specify properties (see "Log properties" on page 128) for your system logs, including the
event log and the audit log. Administrators can only disable/enable audit logging. All other
logs are compulsory.
3. Save your configuration changes by clicking Save in the yellow notification bar in the
upper-right corner of the Management Application.
Log properties
Your system can generate various types of logs. When you configure logs, you can define the
following:
General Logs
Management Application log, Recording Server service log, Image Server service log, and Image
Import service log
These log files are by default placed in the appropriate All Users
folder for the operating system you are using.
Path
Days to log
Advanced configuration
To specify another location for your log files, type the path to the
required folder in the Path field, or click the browse button next
to the field to browse to the required folder.
A new log file is created for each day on which events occur. A
log file older than the number of days specified in the field is
automatically deleted. By default, the log file will be stored for
seven days. To specify another number of days (max. 9999),
simply overwrite the value in the field. The current day's activity
is always logged, even with a value of 0 in the field. Therefore, if
you specify 0, you will log current day's activity; if you specify 1,
you will keep one day plus the current day's activity, and so on.
128
Network Video Management System Standard Edition 2016 R3 - Administrator Manual
Event Log
These log files are by default placed in the appropriate All Users
folder for the operating system you are using.
Path
Days to log
To specify another location for your log files, type the path to the
required folder in the Path field, or click the browse button next
to the field to browse to the required folder.
A new log file is created for each day on which events occur. A
log file older than the number of days specified in the field is
automatically deleted. By default, the log file will be stored for
seven days. To specify another number of days (max. 9999),
simply overwrite the value in the field. The current day's activity
is always logged, even with a value of 0 in the field. Therefore, if
you specify 0, you will log current day's activity; if you specify 1,
you will keep one day plus the current day's activity, and so on.
Audit Log
Enable audit logging
Audit logging is the only type of system logging which is not
compulsory. Select/clear the check box to enable/disable audit
logging.
These log files are by default placed in the appropriate All Users
folder for the operating system you are using.
Path
To specify another location for your log files, type the path to the
required folder in the Path field, or click the browse button next
to the field to browse to the required folder.
Days to log
A new log file is created for each day with audit logging enabled
and client user activity. A log file older than the number of days
specified in the field is automatically deleted. By default, the log
file is stored for seven days. To specify another number of days
(max. 9999), overwrite the value in the field. The current day's
activity is always logged (provided audit logging is enabled and
there is user activity). Therefore, if you specify 1, you keep one
day plus the current day's activity. Note that if you specify 0
(zero), audit log files are kept indefinitely (disk space permitting).
Minimum logging interval
Minimum number of seconds between logged events. Specifying a
high number of seconds between logged events may help reduce
the size of the audit log. Default is 60 seconds.
In sequence timespan
The number of seconds to pass for viewed images to be
considered to be within the same sequence. Specifying a high
number of seconds may help limit the number of viewed
sequences logged and reduce the size of the audit log. The
default is ten seconds.
Advanced configuration
129
Network Video Management System Standard Edition 2016 R3 - Administrator Manual
Notifications
About notifications
In case of problems with hardware, activation of motion detection on your camera or similar
incidents, you can set up your system to send notifications through SMS and/or email.
Email
About email
With email notifications, you can instantly get notified when your surveillance system requires
attention. Your system can automatically send e-mail notifications to one or more recipients when:
•
Motion is detected
•
Events occur. You can select individually for each event whether you want to receive an
email notification or not.
•
Archiving fails (if email notification has been selected as part of the archiving properties)
Configure email notifications
To set up email notifications, do the following:
1. Expand Advanced Configuration, expand Notifications, right-click Email and select
Properties.
2. Enable the use of email by selecting the Enable email check box.
3. Specify required properties (see "Message Settings (email)" on page 130).
4. Choose a schedule profile to associate with your email notifications. Your system comes
with two simple schedule profiles, Always on and Always off, which you cannot edit or
delete. If these do not meet your needs, you can create any number of customized
schedule profiles for each camera. You can reuse a customized schedule profile for more
than one purpose if you want to.
Email (Properties)
Message Settings (email)
Specify the following message settings for email:
Enable
Advanced configuration
Select to enable the use of email notifications, allowing you to
specify further properties.
130
Network Video Management System Standard Edition 2016 R3 - Administrator Manual
Recipient(s)
Specify the email addresses to which the system should send
email notifications. To specify more than one e-mail address,
separate the e-mail addresses with semicolons (example:
aa@aa.aa; bb@bb.bb; cc@cc.cc).
Subject text
Enter a subject text for email notifications.
Message text
Enter a message text for email notifications. Note that camera
information as well as date and time information is automatically
included in email notifications.
Click a link to include a variable to the notification. The options
are:
Variables
•
Name of triggering event
•
Camera name
•
Trigger time (the time when the notification was registered)
•
Error text (for example, camera failure)
Ignore similar messages
for:
Specify the number of seconds to ignore sending similar
notifications. This function is to ensure that you do not receive
too many notifications before you have solved the relevant
problem.
Use schedule profile
Select the schedule profile you want to use. By default, you can
choose between Always On, Always Off or choose Add new...
to set up a custom schedule (see "Notification Scheduling
properties" on page 134).
Attachment Settings (email)
Specify the following attachment settings:
Select the check box to include still images in email notifications.
When selected, each email notification includes one or more
attached still JPEG images.
Include images
Attached images includes images of before the incident, after the
incident and the actual incident, with the incident that triggered
the notification in the middle.
Important: If your device does not record any images while the
sending of notifications are turned on, no images are included in
the email notification you receive.
Number of images
The number of images you want to include in the email. You can
include between 1 and 20 images.
Time between images (ms)
Minimum time (in milliseconds) to be between each image. You
can set any time range between 0 and 300 seconds (5 minutes).
Embed images in email
Select the check box to embed images directly in the email.
Advanced configuration
131
Network Video Management System Standard Edition 2016 R3 - Administrator Manual
Server Settings (email)
Specify the following server settings for email:
Sender e-mail address
Enter the email address you wish to use as the sender of the
email notification.
Type the name of the SMTP (Simple Mail Transfer Protocol) server
that you want to use to send the email notifications.
Outgoing mail server
address (SMTP)
Compared with other mail transfer methods, SMTP has the
advantage that you avoid automatically triggered warnings from
your email client. Such warnings may otherwise inform you that
your email client is trying to automatically send email messages
on your behalf.
TLS (Transport Layer Security) and its predecessor, SSL (Secure
Socket Layer), are supported.
Outgoing mail server port
(SMTP)
Type the port for your mail server. The default port number is 25.
Server requires login
Select the check box if you must use a user name and password
to use the SMTP server.
Security type
Choose the type of security you want to use.
User name
Password
Max attachment size (MB)
Specify the user name required for using the SMTP server.
Only relevant when you have selected Server requires login.
Specify the password required for using the SMTP server.
Only relevant if you have selected Server requires login.
Specify a maximum size of attached images.
SMS
About SMS
With SMS notifications, you can instantly get notified on your mobile device when your surveillance
system requires attention. To use the SMS notification feature, you must connect a 3G/USB
modem to the server on which you have installed your system.
Your system can automatically send SMS notifications when:
•
Motion is detected
•
Events occur. You can select individually for each event whether you want to receive an
SMS notification or not.
•
Archiving fails (if an SMS notification has been selected as part of the archiving properties).
Advanced configuration
132
Network Video Management System Standard Edition 2016 R3 - Administrator Manual
Configure SMS notifications
To configure SMS notifications, do the following:
1. Expand Advanced Configuration, expand Notifications, right-click SMS and select
Properties.
2. Enable the use of SMS by selecting the Enable SMS check box.
3. Specify required properties.
4. Choose a schedule profile to associate with your SMS notifications.
Note: Your system comes with two simple schedule profiles, Always on and Always off, which
you cannot edit or delete. If these do not meet your needs, you can create any number of
customized schedule profiles for each camera. You can reuse a customized schedule profile for
more than one purpose if you want to.
SMS properties
Message Settings (SMS)
Specify the following message settings for SMS:
Enable SMS
Enables the use of SMS notifications, allowing you to specify
further properties.
Recipient(s)
Indicate the telephone number of the recipient. To send SMS to
more than one recipient, separate the phone numbers with a
semicolon.
Message text
Specify required message text for the SMS notification. Message
text must only contain the following characters: a-z, A-Z, 0-9 as
well as commas (,) and full stops (.). Note that camera
information, date and time information are all automatically
included in SMS notifications.
Click a link to include a variable to the notification. The options
are:
Variables
•
Name of triggering event
•
Camera name
•
Trigger time (the time when the notification was registered)
•
Error text (for example, camera failure)
Ignore similar messages
for:
Specify the number of seconds to ignore sending similar
notifications. This function is to ensure that you do not receive
too many notifications before you have solved the relevant
problem.
Use schedule profile
Select the schedule profile you want to use. By default, you can
choose between Always On, Always Off or choose Add new...
to set up a custom schedule (see "Notification Scheduling
properties" on page 134).
Advanced configuration
133
Network Video Management System Standard Edition 2016 R3 - Administrator Manual
Server Settings (SMS)
Specify the following server settings for SMS:
Serial port
Select the serial port to use for your USB/3G modem. The list
that allows you to choose ports shows open serial ports on the
computer running your system.
Speed
The baud speed of your USB modem device. The default value is
9600 baud. Although you can set any custom value for the baud
rate, Sony does not recommend that you change the baud rate
unless you are a highly advanced user.
SIM card PIN code
Specify PIN code for the SIM card inserted in the USB/3G
modem.
Different types of SMS encodings exist to accommodate various
language needs in the world. Your system offers you the following
options:
SMS encoding
•
7-bit
•
8-bit (default)
•
16-bit
7-bit encryption allows you to use up to 160 characters per SMS,
however it also limits the type of characters you can use.
8-bit encryption is the standard form of encryption with more
special characters allowed. It allows you to use up to 140
characters per SMS.
16-bit encryption is necessary for non-Latin alphabet languages.
Characters from, for example, Arabic, Chinese, Korean, Japanese
or Cyrillic alphabet languages require 16-bit SMS encoding. If you
use any of these languages in your organization, you must set
your system to use 16-bit encoding. 16-bit has a limit of 70
characters per SMS.
Scheduling
About scheduling of notifications
Scheduling of notifications allows you to set up schedule profiles which you can use with Email (see
"Message Settings (email)" on page 130) and SMS (see "Message Settings (SMS)" on page 133)
notifications.
Advanced configuration
134
Network Video Management System Standard Edition 2016 R3 - Administrator Manual
Notification Scheduling properties
When you set up schedules to use with email or SMS notifications, specify the following:
Select the relevant profile (for example Always on) for your
notification schedule profile.
Notification profile
You specify a notification schedule profile by creating schedule
profiles based on:
•
Periods of time (example: Mondays from 08.30 until 17.45),
shown in blue:
Server access
About server access
You can configure clients' access to your system's server in two ways:
•
Wizard-driven: Specify how clients access the server and which users can use clients
through guided configuration. When you use the wizard, all users that you add have access
to all cameras, including new cameras added at a later stage. If this is not what you want,
specify access settings, users and user rights separately.
•
Through advanced configuration: This was known as Image Server administration in
previous versions.
About registered services
Registered services displays the services installed and running on your system. It displays the
following information about the individual services:
Name
Description
Enabled
Indicates if the relevant service is enabled.
Name
The name of the service.
Description
A description of the service.
Addresses
The inside and outside addresses used by the service.
You can change the inside and outside addresses for a service. To do this, click the Edit button and
enter the relevant inside and/or outside addresses. Note that you cannot edit all services. You can
delete a service registration from the system by clicking the Delete button. You are prompted for
confirmation before the service is deleted.
Advanced configuration
135
Network Video Management System Standard Edition 2016 R3 - Administrator Manual
Configure server access
1. Expand Advanced Configuration, right-click Server Access and select Properties.
2. Specify required properties for Server Access, Local IP Ranges, and Language Support and
XML Encoding. Your system comes with two simple schedule profiles, Always on and
Always off, which you cannot edit or delete. If these do not meet your needs, you can
create any number of customized schedule profiles for each camera. You can reuse a
customized schedule profile for more than one purpose if you want to.
3. Save your configuration changes by clicking Save in the yellow notification bar in the
upper-right corner of the Management Application.
When you use this option, you configure client users separately from clients' access. See Add
individual users, Add user groups, and Configure user and group rights.
Server access properties
Server access
You can configure client's access to the system server or server access. Specify the following:
Server name
Name of the surveillance system server as it appears in clients.
Client users with rights to configure their clients see the name of
the server when they create views in their clients.
Local port
Port number to use for communication between clients and the
surveillance server. The default port number is 80; you can
change the port number if port 80 is used for other purposes in
your organization.
Select the check box if the server should be accessible from the
Internet through a router or firewall.
Enable Internet access
If you select this option, also specify the public (“outside”) IP
address and port number in the following fields. When using
public access, the router or firewall used must be configured so
requests sent to the public IP address and port are forwarded to
the local (“inside”) IP address and port of the surveillance system
server.
Internet address
Specify a public IP address or hostname for use when the system
server should be available from the Internet.
Internet port
Specify a port number for use when the system should be
available from the Internet. The default port number is 80. You
can change the port number if needed.
Advanced configuration
136
Network Video Management System Standard Edition 2016 R3 - Administrator Manual
You can limit the number of clients allowed to connect at the
same time. Depending on your system configuration and the
performance of the hardware and network used, limiting the
number of simultaneously connected clients may help reduce
server load. If more than the allowed number of simultaneously
connected clients attempt to log in, only the allowed number of
clients are allowed access. Any clients in excess of the allowed
number receive an error message when attempting to log in.
Max. number of clients
By default, a maximum of ten simultaneously connected clients
are allowed. To specify a different maximum number, overwrite
the value.
To allow an unlimited number of simultaneously connected access
clients, type 0 (zero) in the Max. number of clients field.
A four-minute session timeout period applies for client sessions
on the system. In many cases, client users may not notice this at
all. Note that the session timeout period is very evident if you set
the max. number of clients value to 1. When that is the case, and
the single allowed client user logs out, four minutes must pass
before you can log in again.
Local IP ranges
You can specify IP address ranges which your system should recognize as coming from a local
network. This can be relevant if different subnets are used across your local network.
If you click the Add button, you can set:
Start Address
Specify the first IP address in the range.
End Address
Specify the last IP address in the range.
Repeat the process if you want to add other local IP address ranges.
Language support and XML encoding
You can select the language/character set that should be used by your system's server and clients.
Select relevant the language/character set.
Character
encoding/Language
Example: Select Japanese if your surveillance system server is
running on a Japanese version of Windows. If the clients you use
to access the system also run on a Japanese version of Windows,
the Japanese language/character set ensure that the correct
language and character encoding is in the communication
between clients and the server.
If you are running a master/slave setup, remember to specify the
same language/character set on all relevant servers.
Only Network Video Management System Standard Edition and
Network Video Management System Standard Edition support
master/slave functionality.
Advanced configuration
137
Network Video Management System Standard Edition 2016 R3 - Administrator Manual
Master/Slave
About master and slave
A master/slave setup allows you to combine several servers and extend the total number of
cameras you can use beyond the maximum allowed number of cameras for a single server. A
master/slave setup also allows remote users to transparently connect to more than one server at
the same time. When remote users connect to the master server, they instantly get access to feeds
from hardware devices on the slave servers as well.
You can designate maximum 1 master and 8 slave servers per software license file.
You can have different product versions on the master and the slave servers, but the master server
must use the newest version of the software and the slave servers must not run versions that go
more than two versions back compared to the product running on the master server.
You can verify the connection to your slaves by clicking Update Status and let the system report
the number of connected slaves back to you.
Configure master and slave servers
1. Expand Advanced Configuration, right-click Master/Slave and select Properties.
2. Select the Enable as master server check box.
3. Click Add to add a slave server.
4. Specify slave server properties. When ready, click OK.
Master/slave properties
You can set the following properties for master servers and slave servers:
Master server properties
Enable as master server
Select to enable as master server.
Timeout
Set timeout of slave update. See Update Status on Slaves
further below.
Add
Lets you add slave servers. Select Master Server in the list and
click the Add button.
Pre version 8.0 slaves
Select this to enable support of slaves running Network Video
Management System Standard Edition versions prior to version
8.0.
Selecting Pre version 8.0 slaves disables the update slave status
feature for all slaves, both pre 8.0 and beyond.
When you select Master Server, the Delete button is disabled and the Add button is enabled
(provided you have selected Enabled as master server). This allows you to add slave servers to
the master server, but prevents you from deleting the master server.
Advanced configuration
138
Network Video Management System Standard Edition 2016 R3 - Administrator Manual
Slave server properties
Address
IP address of the slave server.
Port
Port number of the slave server.
Delete
Remove a slave server from the list of slave servers. Select the
slave server in the list and click the Delete button.
If you want a slave server to become a master server, clear Enable as master server on the
original master server and click OK. In the navigation pane, right-click the slave server which you
want to become master server and select Properties. Then select Enable as master server.
Next click Add to add slave servers to the new master server.
Update status on slaves
In the Master Settings Summary and Slave Settings Summary table area, you can
verify/update added slaves by clicking Update Status. A status dialog runs and afterwards informs
you of the status of your slave server(s).
If you select Pre version 8.0 slaves, you cannot update slave status on any slaves and Update
Status is therefore disabled. In the Slave Settings Summary table, slave status on all slaves is
Not applicable.
If you do not select Pre version 8.0 slaves, slave status for pre version 8.0 slaves is
Unreachable. Slave status for 8.0 slaves and beyond reflects the actual status.
Users
About users
The term users primarily refers to users who connect to the surveillance system through their
clients. You can configure such users in two ways:
•
As
basic users, authenticated by a user name/password combination.
•
As
Windows users, authenticated based on their Windows login
You can add both types of users through the Configure User Access wizard or individually (see Add
basic users (on page 139) and Add Windows users (on page 140)).
By grouping users, you can specify rights for all users within a group in one go. If you have many
users performing similar tasks, this can save you significant amounts of work. User groups are
logical groups created and used for practical purposes in the Management Application only. They
are not in any way connected with user groups from central directory services. If you want to use
groups, make sure you add groups before you add users: you cannot add existing users to groups.
Finally, the Administrators group is also listed under Users. This is a default Windows user group
for administration purpose which automatically has access to the Management Application.
Add basic users
When you add a basic user, you create a dedicated surveillance system user account with basic
user name and password authentication for the individual user. Note that creating Windows users
Advanced configuration
139
Network Video Management System Standard Edition 2016 R3 - Administrator Manual
provides better security. If you want to include users in groups, make sure you add required
groups before you add users. You cannot add existing users to groups.
You can add basic users in two ways: One is through the Configure User Access wizard.
Alternatively, add basic users this way:
1. Expand Advanced Configuration, right-click Users, and select Add New Basic User.
2. Specify a user name. Specify a password, and repeat it to be sure you have specified it
correctly. Click OK.
3. Specify General Access and Camera Access properties. These properties determine the
rights of the user. Click OK.
4. Save your configuration changes by clicking Save in the yellow notification bar in the
upper-right corner of the Management Application.
Add Windows users
When you add Windows users, you import users defined locally on the server and authenticate
them based on their Windows login. This generally provides better security than the basic user
concept, and it is the method Sony recommends. If you want to include users in groups, make sure
you add required groups before you add users. You cannot add existing users to groups.
Add Windows users in two ways: One is through the Manage user access wizard. Alternatively, add
Windows users this way:
1. Expand Advanced Configuration, right-click Users, and select Add New Windows User.
This opens the Select Users or Groups dialog.
the Locations... button.
2. In the Enter the object names to select box, type the relevant user name(s), then use
the Check Names feature to verify it. If you type several user names, separate each name
with a semicolon. Example: Brian; Hannah; Karen; Wayne
3. When done, click OK.
4. Specify General Access and Camera Access properties. These properties determine the
rights of the user.
5. Click OK.
6. Save your configuration changes by clicking Save in the yellow notification bar in the
upper-right corner of the Management Application.
Users added from a local database logging in with a client should not specify any server name, PC
name, or IP address as part of the user name. Example of a correctly specified user name:
USER001. Example of an incorrectly specified user name: PC001/USER001. The user should still
specify a password and any required server information.
Add user groups
User groups are logical groups created and used for practical purposes in the Management
Application only. They are not in any way connected with user groups from central directory
services.
By grouping users, you can specify rights (see "Configure user and group rights" on page 141) for
all users within a group in one go. If you have many users performing similar tasks, this can save
Advanced configuration
140
Network Video Management System Standard Edition 2016 R3 - Administrator Manual
you significant amounts of work. Make sure you add groups before you add users: you cannot add
existing users to groups.
1. Expand Advanced Configuration, right-click Users, and select Add New User Group.
2. Specify a name. Names must be unique, and must not contain any of these special
characters: < > & ' " \ / : * ? | [ ]
3. Click OK.
4. Specify General access (on page 142) and Camera access (on page 143) properties. These
properties will determine the rights of the group's future members.
5. Click OK.
6. Save your configuration changes by clicking Save in the yellow notification bar in the
upper-right corner of the Management Application.
7. Now you can add users to the group: in the navigation pane, right-click the group you just
created, and Add basic users (on page 139) or Add Windows users (on page 140) as
required.
Configure user and group rights
User/group rights are configured during the process of adding users/groups, see Add basic Users
(on page 139), Add Windows users (on page 140) and Add user groups (on page 140). Note that
you can also add basic and Windows users through the Manage user access wizard (on page 52).
When you use the wizard, all users you add gain access to all cameras, including any cameras
added at a later stage.
If you want to edit the rights of a user or group:
1. Expand Advanced Configuration, expand Users, right-click the required user or group,
and select Properties.
2. Set the required user rights under the relevant tabs shown. The properties you set here
determine the rights of the user/group. Click OK.
3. Save your configuration changes by clicking Save in the yellow notification bar in the
upper-right corner of the Management Application.
User properties
User information
You can change the following user information:
User name
Password
Edit the user name. You can only edit this if the selected user is a
basic user. Names must be unique, and must not contain any of
these special characters: < > & ' " \ / : * ? | [ ]
Edit the password. Remember to repeat the password to be sure
you have specified it correctly.
You can only edit the password for basic users.
User type
Advanced configuration
You cannot edit this field. It shows whether the selected user is a
basic user or a Windows user group.
141
Network Video Management System Standard Edition 2016 R3 - Administrator Manual
Group information
Group name
Edit the group name. Names must be unique, and must not
contain any of these special characters: <
> & ' " \ / : * ? | [ ]
General access
Specify the following settings for General access when you add or edit basic users (see "Add basic
users" on page 139), Windows users (see "Add Windows users" on page 140) or groups (see "Add
user groups" on page 140):
Client access settings
Live
Enables access to the Live tab in Network Video Management
System Smart Client.
Playback
Enables access to the Playback tab in Network Video
Management System Smart Client.
Setup
Enables access to setup mode in Network Video Management
System Smart Client.
Enables the user to create and edit views in shared groups in
Network Video Management System Smart Client.
Edit shared views
Every user can access views placed in shared groups. If a
user/group does not have this right, shared groups are protected,
indicated by a padlock icon in Network Video Management
System Smart Client.
Enables the user to create and edit views in private groups in
Network Video Management System Smart Client.
Edit private views
Views placed in private groups can only be accessed by the user
who created them. If a user/group does not have this right,
private groups will be protected, indicated by a padlock icon in
Network Video Management System Smart Client. Denying users
the right to create their own views may make sense in some
cases, for example, to limit bandwidth use.
For more information about shared and private views, see the
separate Network Video Management System Smart Client
documentation.
Clear the Live, Playback and Setup check boxes to disable the user/group's ability to use
Network Video Management System Smart Client. You can use this as a temporary alternative to
deleting the user/group if a user/group is not going to use an account for a period of time.
Advanced configuration
142
Network Video Management System Standard Edition 2016 R3 - Administrator Manual
Management Application access
Enables the user to access and work with the Management
Application.
Administrator Access
If you have more than one Administrator member, you can clear
the check box to ensure that other administrators cannot access
the Management Application.
Login authorization
This user/group requires
authorization from another
user to log in
Enables a restriction on the user/group which means that a
second user must authorize the log in before the user/group can
log in to Network Video Management System Smart Client or the
Management Application.
This user/group can
authorize logins from other
users
Enables the right for this user/group to authorize the log in for
other users in Network Video Management System Smart Client
or the Management Application.
At least one person on the system must have a full administrator access with no authorization of
log in. This is why the administrator should ensure that all proper user rights are given to other
users of the system. If there are no users to authorize, the This user/group requires
authorization from another user to log in checkbox is not available and you cannot change its
settings.
If there is only one user on the system, the This user/group can authorize logins from other
users check box is not available and you cannot change its settings.
Camera access
When you add or edit basic users (see "Add basic users" on page 139), Windows users (see "Add
Windows users" on page 140) or groups (see "Add user groups" on page 140), you can specify
camera access settings.
In the list of cameras, select the camera(s) you want to work with. Note the last item in the list,
Rights for new cameras when added to the system, with which you can allow the user/group
access to any future cameras.
Tip: Use SHIFT or CTRL to select multiple cameras the same features should be available for
access for several cameras, you can select multiple cameras by pressing SHIFT or CTRL on your
keyboard while you select.
For the selected camera(s), in the Access check box, specify if the user/group should have access
to live viewing and playback at all. If so, specify if they should have access to both live viewing
and playback and—if this is the case—which sub-features should be available when you work with
the selected camera(s). The sub-features are listed in two columns in the lower part of the window:
the left column lists features related to live viewing, the right column lists features related to
playback.
The Camera access settings check boxes work like a hierarchy of rights. If the Access check box
is cleared, everything else is cleared and disabled. If the Access check box is selected, but, for
example, the Live check box is cleared, everything under the Live check box is cleared and
disabled.
Depending on the selected column, the following default features for live or playback from the
selected camera(s) give you the ability to:
Advanced configuration
143
Network Video Management System Standard Edition 2016 R3 - Administrator Manual
Live
Features
Use navigation features for PTZ (Pan-tilt-zoom) cameras.
PTZ
A user/group can only use this right if the user has access to one
or more PTZ cameras.
PTZ preset positions
Use navigation features for moving a PTZ camera to particular
preset positions. A user/group can only use this right if the
user/group has access to one or more PTZ cameras with defined
preset positions.
Manage PTZ presets
Manage PTZ positions in Network Video Management System
Smart Client.
Output
Activate output related to the selected camera(s).
Events
Use manually triggered events related to the selected camera(s).
This feature is available in Network Video Management System
Smart Client only.
Incoming audio
Listen to incoming audio from microphones related to the
selected camera(s). This feature is available in Network Video
Management System Smart Client only.
Manual recording
Manually start recording for a fixed time (defined (see "Manual
recording" on page 75) by the surveillance system administrator).
Outgoing audio
Talk to audiences through speakers related to the selected
camera(s). This feature is available in Network Video
Management System Smart Client only.
Playback
Features
AVI/JPEG export
Export evidence as movie clips in AVI format and as still images
in JPEG format.
Database export
Export evidence in database format. This feature is available in
Network Video Management System Smart Client only.
Sequences
Use the Sequences feature when playing back video from the
selected camera.
Smart search
Search for motion in one or more selected areas of images from
the selected camera. This feature is available in Network Video
Management System Smart Client only.
Recorded audio
Listen to recorded audio from microphones related to the selected
camera(s).
You cannot select a feature, if the selected camera does not support the relevant feature. For
example, PTZ-related rights are only available if the relevant camera is a PTZ camera. Some
features depend on the user’s/group’s General Access (on page 142) properties.
Square-filled check boxes can appear in the lower part of the window if you have selected several
cameras and a feature applies for some but not all of the cameras.
Advanced configuration
144
Network Video Management System Standard Edition 2016 R3 - Administrator Manual
Example: For camera A, you have selected that use of the Events is allowed, for camera B, you
have not allowed this. If you select both camera A and camera B in the list, the Events check box
in the lower part of the window is square-filled. Another example: Camera C is a PTZ camera for
which you have allowed the PTZ preset positions feature whereas camera D is not a PTZ camera. If
you select both camera C and camera D in the list, the PTZ preset positions check box is
square-filled.
Services
About services
The following services are all automatically installed on the system server if you run a Typical
installation. By default, services run transparently in the background on the system server. If you
need to, you can start and stop services separately, see Start and stop services (on page 147).
Service
Description
Sony Recording Server
service
A vital part of the surveillance system. Video streams are only
transferred to your system while the Recording Server service is
running.
Provides access to the surveillance system for users who log in
with Network Video Management System Smart Client.
Sony Image Server service
Note: If the Image Server service is configured in Windows
Services to log in with another account than the Local System
account, for example as a domain user, installed Network Video
Management System Smart Clients on other computers than the
surveillance server itself cannot log in to the server using the
server's host name. Instead, those users must enter the server's
IP address.
Used for fetching pre- and post-alarm images, and storing the
fetched images in camera databases.
Sony Image Import service
Pre- and post-alarm images is a feature available for selected
cameras only that enables sending of images from immediately
before and after an event took place from the camera to the
surveillance system via e-mail. Pre- and post-alarm images
should not be confused with the system's pre- and post-recording
feature (see "Recording" on page 85).
Sony Log Check service
Performs integrity checks on your system's log files.
Sony Event Server service
Manages all alarms and map-related communication. It stores
events, image files and map configurations, and makes status
information about the surveillance system available.
Notification server service
Manages sending email or SMS notifications from the system to
users.
NVMS Mobile service
Manages the communication between the Recording Server and
mobile devices (such as smartphones and tablets) and between
the Recording Server and web browsers.
If you run a Custom installation, you can choose not to install the Event Server. If you do so, the
Event Server service is not seen in your Services overview.
Advanced configuration
145
Network Video Management System Standard Edition 2016 R3 - Administrator Manual
About the tray icons
The tray icons in the table represent the possible states of the services running on Management
Server, Recording Server, and Event Server. They are all visible on the computers where the
servers are installed, in the notification area:
Management
Server
service
icon
Recording
Server
service
icon
Event
Server
service
icon
Description
Running
Appears when a server service is
enabled and started.
Stopped
Appears when a server service has
stopped.
Starting
Appears when a server service is in the
process of starting. Under normal
circumstances, the tray icon changes
after a short while to Running.
Stopping
Appears when a server service is in the
process of stopping. Under normal
circumstances, the tray icon changes
after a short while to Stopped.
In indeterminate state
Appears when the server service is
initially loaded and until the first
information is received, upon which the
tray icon, under normal circumstances,
changes to Starting and afterwards to
Running.
Running offline
Typically appears when the Recording
Server service is running but the
Management Server service is not.
Advanced configuration
146
Network Video Management System Standard Edition 2016 R3 - Administrator Manual
Management
Server
service
icon
Recording
Server
service
icon
Event
Server
service
icon
Description
Must be authorized by
administrator
Appears when the Recording Server
service is loaded for the first time.
Administrators authorize the recording
server through the Management Client:
Expand the Servers list, select the
Recording Server node and in the
Overview pane, right-click the
relevant recording server and select
Authorize Recording Server.
Start and stop services
On a system server, several services by default run in the background. If you need to, you can
start and stop each service separately:
1. Expand Advanced Configuration and select Services. This displays the status of each
service.
2. You can now stop each service by clicking the Stop button. When a service is stopped, the
button changes to Start, allowing you to start the service again when required.
Start, stop, or restart the Event Server service
In the notification area, a tray icon indicates the state of the Event Server service, for example
Running. Through this icon, you can start, stop, or restart the Event Server service. If you stop
the service, parts of the system will not work, including events and alarms. However, you can still
view and record video. For more information, see Stopping the Event Server service.
1. In the notification area, right-click the tray icon for the Event Server. A context-menu
appears.
2. If the service has stopped, click Start Event Server service to start it. The tray icon
changes to reflect the new state.
Advanced configuration
147
Network Video Management System Standard Edition 2016 R3 - Administrator Manual
3. To restart or stop the service, click Restart Event Server service or Stop Event Server
service.
For more information about the tray icons, see About the tray icons (on page 146).
See also
Start or stop the Recording Server service
Servers
NVMS Mobile
NVMS Mobile introduction
About NVMS Mobile
NVMS Mobile consists of three components:
•
NVMS Mobile client
•
NVMS Mobile server
•
NVMS Mobile plug-in
The NVMS Mobile client is a mobile surveillance app that you can install and use on your Android
device or Apple device. You can use as many installations of NVMS Mobile client as you need.
For more information, download the NVMS Mobile client User Guide from the Sony Corporation
website http://www.sony.net/CameraSystem/NVMS/Manuals.
The NVMS Mobile server and NVMS Mobile plug-in are covered in this manual.
Prerequisites for using NVMS Mobile
Before you can start using NVMS Mobile, you must make sure that you have the following:
•
A running VMS installed and configured with at least one user.
•
Cameras and views set up in Network Video Management System Smart Client.
•
A mobile device running Android or iOS with access to Google Play or App Store℠ from
which you can download the NVMS Mobile client application.
Advanced configuration
148
Network Video Management System Standard Edition 2016 R3 - Administrator Manual
NVMS Mobile configuration
About NVMS Mobile server
NVMS Mobile server handles log-ins to the system from NVMS Mobile client from a mobile device or
Network Video Management System Web Client.
A NVMS Mobile server distributes video streams from recording servers to NVMS Mobile clients.
This offers a secure setup where recording servers are never connected to the Internet. When a
NVMS Mobile server receives video streams from recording servers, it also handles the complex
conversion of codecs and formats allowing streaming of video on the mobile device.
You must install NVMS Mobile server on any computer from which you want to access recording
servers. When you install NVMS Mobile server, make sure you log in using an account that has
administrator rights. Otherwise, installation will not complete successfully.
About master/slave servers
If your system supports master/slave servers, you can access such servers with your NVMS Mobile
client. Use this functionality to gain access to all cameras on all slave servers by logging in to the
master server.
This means that when users of the NVMS Mobile client log in to a server to see cameras from all
servers in your system, they must connect to the IP address of the master server. Users must have
administrator rights on all servers in the system in order for the cameras to show up in the NVMS
Mobile client.
Add or edit a Mobile server
1. Go to Servers > Mobile Servers. From the menu that appears, select Create New. Enter
or edit the settings.
Important: If you edit settings for Login method, All cameras view, and Outputs and events
while you or others are connected to the NVMS Mobile client, you must restart the NVMS Mobile
client for the new settings to take effect.
Set up investigations
Set up investigations so that people can use Web Client and NVMS Mobile to access recorded video
and investigate incidents, and prepare and download video evidence.
To set up investigations, follow these steps:
1. In Management Application, click the mobile server, and then click the Investigations tab.
2. Select the Enabled check box. By default, the check box is selected.
3. In the Investigations folder field, specify where to store video for investigations.
4. In the Limit size of investigations to field, enter the maximum number of megabytes
that the investigation folder can contain.
5. Optional: To allow users to access investigations that other users create, select the View
investigations made by others check box. If you do not select this check box, users can
see only their own investigations.
Advanced configuration
149
Network Video Management System Standard Edition 2016 R3 - Administrator Manual
6. Optional: To include the date and time that a video was downloaded, select the Include
timestamps for AVI exports check box.
7. In the Used codec for AVI exports field, select the compression format to use when
preparing AVI packages for download.
Note: The codecs in the list can differ, depending on your operating system. If you do not
see the codec you want to use, you can install it on the computer where Management
Application is running and it will display in this list.
Additionally, codecs can use different compression rates, which can affect video quality.
Higher compression rates reduce storage requirements but can also reduce quality. Lower
compression rates require more storage and network capacity, but can increase quality. It's
a good idea to research the codecs before you select one.
8. In the Failed export data (for MKV and AVI export) field, specify whether to keep the
data that was successfully downloaded, although it can be incomplete, or delete it.
9. To enable users to save investigations, you must grant the following permissions to the
security role assigned to the users:
•
In Network Video Management System Enterprise Edition products, grant the
Export permission.
•
In Network Video Management System Standard Edition products, grant the
Database permission.
Clean up investigations
If you have investigations or video exports that you no longer need to keep, you can delete them.
For example, this can be useful if you want to make more disk space available on the server.
•
To delete an investigation, and all of the video exports that were created for it, select the
investigation in the list, and then click Delete.
•
To delete individual video files that were exported for an investigation, but keeping the
investigation, select the investigation in the list. In the Investigation details group, click
the Delete icon to the right of the Database, AVI, or MKV fields for exports.
About using Video Push to stream video
You can set up Video Push so that users can keep others informed about a situation, or record
video to investigate it later, by streaming video from their mobile device's camera to your Network
Video Management System surveillance system.
Set up Video Push to stream video
To let users stream video from their mobile devices to an Network Video Management System
surveillance system, set up Video Push on a NVMS Mobile server.
In Management Application, perform these steps in the following order:
1. Set up a channel that the mobile device can use to stream video to the recording server.
2. Add the Video Push Driver as a hardware device on the recording server. The driver
simulates a camera device so that you can stream video to the recording server.
3. Assign the Video Push Driver device to the channel.
This topic describes each of these steps.
Advanced configuration
150
Network Video Management System Standard Edition 2016 R3 - Administrator Manual
Set up a channel for streaming video
Note: Each channel requires a hardware device license.
To add a channel, follow these steps:
1. In the navigation pane, select Mobile Server, and select the mobile server.
2. On the Video Push tab, select the Video Push check box.
3. In the bottom right corner, click Add to add a video push channel under Channels
mapping.
4. Enter the user name of the user account that will use the channel. This user account must
be allowed to access the NVMS Mobile server and recording server.
Note: To use Video Push, users must log in to NVMS Mobile on their mobile device using
the user name and password for this account.
5. Make a note of the port number. You will need it when you add the Video Push driver as a
hardware device on the recording server.
6. Click OK to close the Video Push Channel dialog box and the save the channel.
Add the Video Push Driver as a hardware device on the recording server
1. In the navigation pane, click Recording Servers.
2. Right-click the server that you want to stream video to, and click Add Hardware to open
the Add Hardware wizard.
3. Select Manual as the hardware detection method, and click Next.
4. Enter credentials for the camera, as follows:
•
To use the factory default credentials from the camera factory, click Next. Typically,
factory settings are used.
•
If you have changed the credentials on the device, enter that information, and then
click Next.
Note: These are the credentials for the hardware, not for the user. They are not related to
the user name for the channel.
5. In the list of drivers, expand Other, select the Video Push Driver check box, and then
click Next.
Note: The system generates a MAC address for the Video Push Driver device. We
recommend that you use this address. Change it only if you experience problems with the
Video Push Driver device. For example, if you need to add a new address and port number.
6. In the Address field, enter the IP address of the computer where NVMS Mobile server is
installed.
7. In the Port field, enter the port number for the channel you created for streaming video.
The port number was assigned when you created the channel.
8. In the Hardware model column, select Video Push Driver, and then click Next.
9. When the system detects the new hardware, click Next.
Advanced configuration
151
Network Video Management System Standard Edition 2016 R3 - Administrator Manual
10. In the Hardware name template field, specify whether to display either the model of the
hardware and the IP address, or the model only.
11. Specify whether to enable related devices by selecting the Enabled check box. You can
add related devices to the list for Video Push Driver, even though they are not enabled.
You can enable them later.
Note: If you want to use location information when you stream video, you must enable the
Metadata port.
12. Select the default groups for the related devices on the left, or select a specific group in the
Add to Group field. Adding devices to a group can make it easier to apply settings to all
devices at the same time or replace devices.
Add the Video Push Driver device to the channel for video push
1. In the Site navigation pane, click Mobile Servers, and then click the Video Push tab.
2. Click Find Cameras. If successful, the name of the Video Push Driver camera displays in
the Camera Name field.
3. Save your configuration.
Remove a channel that you don't need
You can remove channels that you no longer use.
•
Select the channel to remove, and then click Remove in the lower right corner.
About actions
You can manage the availability of the Actions tab in the NVMS Mobile client by enabling or
disabling this on the Mobile server tab. Actions are by default enabled, and all available actions for
the connected devices are shown here.
About naming an output for use in NVMS Mobile
In order to get actions shown correctly together with current camera, it is important that the
output uses the exact same name as the camera.
Example:
If you have a camera named "AXIS P3301,P3304 - 10.100.50.110 - Camera 1", you must also
name the action "AXIS P3301,P3304 - 10.100.50.110 - Camera 1".
You can add a further description to the title afterwards, for example "AXIS P3301,P3304 10.100.50.110 - Camera 1 - Light switch".
Important: If you do not follow these naming conventions, actions are not available in the action
list for the associated camera's view. Instead, actions appear in the list of other actions on the
Actions tab.
Add an automatic export rule
1. In the Management Application, click the relevant Mobile server > Export Tab.
Advanced configuration
152
Network Video Management System Standard Edition 2016 R3 - Administrator Manual
2. Under Automatic Exports, click Add to open the Auto Export Rule window.
3. Set the relevant Auto Export Rule window settings.
4. When finished, click OK.
Mobile server settings
General
The following table describes the settings on this tab.
Name
Description
Server name
Enter a name of the NVMS Mobile server.
Description
Enter an optional description of the NVMS Mobile server.
Mobile server
Choose between all NVMS Mobile servers currently installed to
the specific system. Only NVMS Mobile servers that are running
are shown in the list.
Login method
Select the authentication method to use when users log in to the
server. You can choose between the following options:
Automatic, Windows authentication, or Basic
authentication.
Enable Network Video
Management System Web
Client
Enable access to Network Video Management System Web Client.
Enable all cameras view
Include the All Cameras view. This view displays all of the
cameras that a user is allowed to view on a recording server.
Enable actions (outputs and
events)
Enable access to actions in NVMS Mobile clients.
Enable keyframes
Stream only keyframes when streaming video. This uses less
bandwidth.
Enable full-size images
Enable the NVMS Mobile server to send full-size images to the
NVMS Mobile client or Network Video Management System Web
Client.
Note that enabling full-size images uses more bandwidth.
Additionally, enabling this option disables all rules set up in the
Performance settings.
Enable direct streaming
Choose how to handle direct streaming in Network Video
Management System Web Client. Choose between enforcing the
use of direct streaming, enforcing it when possible, or never
enforcing it.
Enabled
Enable/disable logging of NVMS Mobile client's actions in a
separate log file.
Log file location
Path to where log files are saved.
Keep logs for
Number of days to keep logs for (default three days).
Advanced configuration
153
Network Video Management System Standard Edition 2016 R3 - Administrator Manual
Name
Description
Configuration backup
Import or export your NVMS Mobile server configuration. Your
system stores the configuration in an XML file.
Connectivity
In the General section, specify the following settings.
Name
Description
Choose how clients should connect to the NVMS Mobile server.
You can choose between the following options: HTTP only,
HTTP and HTTPS or HTTPS Only.
Connection type
Client timeout (HTTP)
Note: If you select HTTPS Only, devices running iOS 9.0 or
later, can connect only if you have a certificate from a certificate
authority (CA) installed on your NVMS Mobile server. CAs issue
digital certificates that verify the identities of users and websites
that exchange data on the Internet. Examples of CAs are
companies like Comodo, Symantec, and GoDaddy. Before you
turn on secure connections, make sure that you are familiar with
digital certificates. To learn how to add a certificate in NVMS
Mobile server, see Edit certificate (on page 160).
Set a time frame for how often the NVMS Mobile client must
indicate to the Mobile server that it is up and running. The default
value is 30 seconds.
Sony recommends that you do not increase the time frame.
Settings in the Internet Access section are used in the following tasks:
•
Configure connection settings.
•
Send an email message to help users connect their mobile device to NVMS Mobile servers.
•
Enable connections to NVMS Mobile servers on a complex network.
Server Status
See the status details for your Mobile server. The details are read-only:
Name
Description
Server active since
Shows how long the Mobile server has been running since it was
last stopped.
CPU usage
Shows current CPU usage on the Mobile server.
Internal bandwidth
Shows the current bandwidth in use between the Mobile server
and the relevant recording server.
External bandwidth
Shows the current bandwidth in use between the mobile device
and Mobile server.
User Name column
Shows user name(s) of the Mobile server user(s) connected to
the Mobile server.
Advanced configuration
154
Network Video Management System Standard Edition 2016 R3 - Administrator Manual
Name
Description
State column
Shows the current relation between the Mobile server and the
NVMS Mobile client user in question. Is the user connected (a
state preliminary to servers exchanging keys and encrypting
credentials) or is he/she actually logged in? Possible states are:
Connected and Logged In Network Video Management System.
Bandwidth Usage column
Shows the level of bandwidth used by the Mobile server client
user in question.
Live Streams column
Shows the number of live video streams currently open for the
NVMS Mobile client user in question.
Playback Streams column
Shows the number of playback video streams currently open for
the relevant mobile client user.
Video Push streams
Shows the number of Video Push stream currently open for the
relevant mobile client user.
Direct Streams
Shows the number of live video streams using Direct Streaming
that are currently open for the relevant mobile user.
Video Push
You can specify the following settings if you enable Video push:
Name
Description
Video push
Enable Video push on the Mobile server.
Number of channels
Specify the number of enabled Video push channels in your
Network Video Management System.
Channel column
Shows the channel number for the relevant channel.
Non-editable.
Port
Port number for the relevant Video push channel.
MAC
MAC address for the relevant Video push channel.
User Name
Enter the user name associated with the relevant video push
channel.
Camera Name
Shows the name of the camera if the camera has been identified.
Once you have completed all necessary steps (see "Set up Video Push to stream video" on page
150), click Find Cameras to search for the relevant camera.
Investigations
You can enable investigations so that people can use Network Video Management System Web
Client and NVMS Mobile to access recorded video and investigate incidents, and prepare and
download video evidence.
The following table describes the settings for investigations.
Name
Description
Investigations folder
Specify where to store video for investigations.
Advanced configuration
155
Network Video Management System Standard Edition 2016 R3 - Administrator Manual
Name
Description
Limit size of investigations
to
Enter the maximum number of megabytes that the investigations
folder can contain.
View investigations made by Select this check box to allow users to access investigations that
others
they did not create.
Include timestamps for AVI
exports
Select this check box to include the date and time that the AVI
file was downloaded.
Select the compression format to use when preparing AVI
packages for download.
Used codec for AVI exports
The codecs you can choose from can differ, depending on your
operating system. If you do not see the codec you want, you can
add it to the list by installing it on the computer where the NVMS
Mobile server is running.
Failed export data (for MKV
and AVI export)
Select whether to keep the data that was not successfully
prepared for download in an investigation, or delete it.
Performance
On the Performance tab, you can set the following limitations on the NVMS Mobile server's
performance:
Level 1
Level 1 is the default limitation placed on the NVMS Mobile server. Any limitations you set here are
always applied to the NVMS Mobile's video stream.
Name
Description
Level 1
Select the check box to enable the first level of limitations to
NVMS Mobile server performance.
Max FPS
Set a limit for the maximum number of frames per second (FPS)
to send from the NVMS Mobile server to clients.
Max image resolution
Set a limit for the image resolution to send from the NVMS Mobile
server to clients.
Level 2
If you would rather like to enforce a different level of limitations that the default one in Level 1,
you can select the Level 2 check box instead. You cannot set any settings higher than what you
have set them to in the first level. If you, for example, set the Max FPS to 45 on Level 1, you can
set the Max FPS on Level 2 only to 44 or below.
Name
Description
Level 2
Select the check box to enable the second level of limitations to
NVMS Mobile server performance.
CPU threshold
Set a threshold for the CPU load on the NVMS Mobile server
before the system enforces video stream limitations.
Advanced configuration
156
Network Video Management System Standard Edition 2016 R3 - Administrator Manual
Bandwidth threshold
Set a threshold for bandwidth load on the NVMS Mobile server
before the system enforces video stream limitations.
Max FPS
Set a limit for the maximum number of frames per second (FPS)
to send from the NVMS Mobile server to clients.
Max image resolution
Set a limit for the image resolution to send from the NVMS Mobile
server to clients.
Level 3
You can also select a Level 3 check box to create a third level for limitations. You cannot set any
settings higher than what you have set them to in Level 1 and Level 2. If you, for example, set
the Max FPS to 45 on Level 1 and to level 32 on Level 2, you can set the Max FPS on Level 3
only to 31 or below.
Name
Description
Level 3
Select the check box to enable the second level of limitations to
NVMS Mobile server performance.
CPU threshold
Set a threshold for the CPU load on the NVMS Mobile server
before the system enforces video stream limitations.
Bandwidth threshold
Set a threshold for bandwidth load on the NVMS Mobile server
before the system enforces video stream limitations.
Max FPS
Set a limit for the frames per second (FPS) to send from the
NVMS Mobile server to clients.
Max image resolution
Set a limit for the image resolution to send from the NVMS Mobile
server to clients.
The system does not instantly switch from one level to another level. If your CPU or bandwidth
threshold goes less than five percent above or below the indicated levels, the current level stays in
use.
Note that if you enable Enable full-size images on the General tab, none of the Performance
levels are applied.
Log Settings
Fill in and specify the following log settings:
Name
Description
Enabled
Enable/disable logging of NVMS Mobile client's actions in a separate
log file.
Log file location
Path to where log files are saved.
Keep logs for
Number of days to keep logs for (default three days).
CPU usage
Default level of CPU usage which will trigger a warning in the log.
Advanced configuration
157
Network Video Management System Standard Edition 2016 R3 - Administrator Manual
Internal bandwidth
Default internal bandwidth usage which will trigger a warning in the
log.
External bandwidth
Default external bandwidth usage which will trigger a warning in the
log.
Check every
Default time frame (30 sec.) for checking warning levels.
Advanced configuration
158
Network Video Management System Standard Edition 2016 R3 - Administrator Manual
Mobile Server Manager
About Mobile Server Manager
The Mobile Server Manager is a tray-controlled feature connected to the Mobile server.
Right-clicking the Mobile Server Manager icon in the system tray opens a menu from which you can
easily access Mobile server functionality.
You can:
•
Open Network Video Management System Web Client (see "Access Network Video
Management System Web Client" on page 17)
•
Start, stop and restart the Mobile service (see "Start, stop and restart Mobile service" on
page 162)
•
Fill in or change surveillance server credentials (see "Fill in/edit surveillance server
credentials" on page 161)
•
Show/edit port numbers (on page 162)
•
Edit certificate (on page 160)
•
Open today's log file (see "About accessing logs and exports" on page 160)
•
Open log folder (see "About accessing logs and exports" on page 160)
•
Open export folder (see "About accessing logs and exports" on page 160)
•
Show Mobile server status (see "About show status" on page 160)
Access Network Video Management System Web Client
If you have a NVMS Mobile server installed on your computer, you can use the Network Video
Management System Web Client to access your cameras and views. Because you do not need to
install Network Video Management System Web Client, you can access it from the computer where
you installed the NVMS Mobile server, or any other computer you want to use for this purpose.
1. Set up the NVMS Mobile server in the Management Application.
2. If you are using the computer where NVMS Mobile server is installed, you can right-click
the NVMS Mobile Server icon in the system tray, and select Open Network Video
Management System Web Client.
3. If you are not using the computer where NVMS Mobile server is installed, you can access it
from a browser. Continue with step 4 in this process.
4. Open an Internet browser (Internet Explorer, Mozilla Firefox, Google Chrome or Safari).
5. Type the external IP address, that is, the external address and port of the server on which
the NVMS Mobile server is running.
Example: The NVMS Mobile server is installed on a server with the IP address 127.2.3.4 and
is configured to accept HTTP connections on port 8081 and HTTPS connections on port 8082
(default settings of the installer).
Advanced configuration
159
Network Video Management System Standard Edition 2016 R3 - Administrator Manual
In the address bar of your browser, type: http://1.2.3.4:8081 or https://1.2.3.4:8082,
depending on whether you want to use a standard HTTP connection or a secure HTTPS
connection. You can now begin using Network Video Management System Web Client.
6. Add the address as a bookmark in your browser for easy future access to Network Video
Management System Web Client. If you use Network Video Management System Web
Client on the local computer on which you installed the NVMS Mobile server, you can also
use the desktop shortcut which the installer creates. Click the shortcut to launch your
default browser and open Network Video Management System Web Client.
You must clear the cache of Internet browsers running the Network Video Management System
Web Client before you can use a new version of the Network Video Management System Web
Client. System administrators must ask their Network Video Management System Web Client users
to clear their browser cache after upgrading, or force this action remotely (you can do this action
only in Internet Explorer in a domain).
About show status
Right-click the Mobile Server Manager icon and select Show Status or double-click the Mobile
Server Manager icon to open a window that shows the status of the Mobile server. You can see the
following information:
Name
Description
Server running since
Time and date of the time when the Mobile server was last
started.
Connected users
Number of users currently connected to the Mobile server.
Hardware decoding
Indicates if hardware accelerated decoding is in action on the
Mobile server.
CPU usage
How many % of the CPU is currently being used by the Mobile
server.
CPU usage history
A graph detailing the history of CPU usage by the Mobile server.
About accessing logs and exports
The Mobile Server Manager lets you quickly access the log file of the day, open the folder to which
logs files are saved, and open the folder to which exports are saved.
To open any one of these, right-click the Mobile Server Manager and select Open Today's Log
File, Open Log Folder or Open Export Folder respectively.
Important: If you uninstall NVMS Mobile from your system, its log files are not deleted.
Administrators with proper rights can access these log files at a later timer, or decide to delete
them if they are not needed any longer. The default location of the log files is in the ProgramData
folder. If you change the default location of log files, existing logs are not copied to the new
location nor are they deleted.
Edit certificate
If you want to use a secure HTTPS protocol to establish connection between a NVMS Mobile server
and your mobile device or the Network Video Management System Web Client, you must have a
valid certificate for the device or web browser to accept the connection. The certificate confirms
that the certificate holder is authorized to establish the connection.
Advanced configuration
160
Network Video Management System Standard Edition 2016 R3 - Administrator Manual
When you install NVMS Mobile server, you generate a self-signed certificate if you run a Typical
installation. If you run a Custom installation, you can choose between generating a self-signed
certificate or loading a file that contains a certificate issued by another trusted site.
Note: If you want to use secure connections (HTTPS), devices running iOS 9.0 or later, can
connect only if you have a certificate from a certificate authority (CA) installed on your NVMS
Mobile server. CAs issue digital certificates that verify the identities of users and websites that
exchange data on the Internet. Examples of CAs are companies like Comodo, Symantec, and
GoDaddy. Before you turn on secure connections, make sure that you are familiar with digital
certificates.
If you want use a different certificate, you can do the following.
1. On a computer where Management Application are installed, right-click the NVMS Mobile
Server icon and select Edit Certificate...
2. Choose one of the following:
•
Generate a self-signed certificate
•
Load a certificate file
Generate a self-signed certificate
1. Choose the Generate a self-signed certificate option and click OK.
2. Wait for a few seconds while the system installs the certificate.
3. When finished, a window opens and informs you that the certificate was installed
successfully. The Mobile service restarts to apply the change.
Locate a certificate file
1. Choose the Load a certificate file option.
2. Fill in the path for the certificate file or click the ... box to open a window where you can
browse for the file.
3. Fill in the password connected to the certificate file.
4. When finished, click OK.
Fill in/edit surveillance server credentials
1. Right-click the Mobile Server Manager and select Surveillance Server Credentials.
2. Fill in the Server URL.
3. Select what user you want to log in as:
•
Local system administrator (no credentials needed) or
•
A specified user account (credentials needed).
4. If you have chosen a specified user account, fill in User Name and Password.
5. When finished, click OK.
Advanced configuration
161
Network Video Management System Standard Edition 2016 R3 - Administrator Manual
Show/edit port numbers
1. Right-click the Mobile Server Manager and select Show/Edit Port Numbers.
2. To edit the port numbers, type the relevant port number. You can indicate a standard port
number (for HTTP connections) and/or a secured port number (for HTTPS connections).
3. When you are done, click OK.
Start, stop and restart Mobile service
If needed, you can start, stop and restart the Mobile service from the Mobile Server Manager.
•
To perform any of these tasks, right-click the Mobile Server Manager and select Start
Mobile service, Stop Mobile service or Restart Mobile service respectively.
Frequently asked questions (FAQs)
1. Why can't I connect from my NVMS Mobile client to my recordings/NVMS Mobile
server?
In order to connect to your recordings, the NVMS Mobile server must be installed on the
server that runs your Network Video Management System or alternatively on a dedicated
server. The relevant NVMS Mobile settings are also needed in your Network Video
Management System video management setup. These are installed as either plug-ins or as
part of a product installation or upgrade. For details on how to get the NVMS Mobile server
and how to integrate the NVMS Mobile client-related settings in your Network Video
Management System, see the configuration section (see "NVMS Mobile configuration" on
page 149).
2. I installed the NVMS Mobile server to Network Video Management System
Enterprise Edition, but I can’t connect to the server from my device. What is the
problem?
After you have installed the NVMS Mobile server to your Network Video Management
System Enterprise Edition (4.0+), you must install the NVMS Mobile plug-in to see the
NVMS Mobile server in your Network Video Management System Enterprise Edition setup.
When you have installed the NVMS Mobile plug-in, locate the plug-in under Servers >
Mobile Servers and right-click to add a new mobile server. Here, you add the details about
your NVMS Mobile server (Server name, Description (optional), Server Address, Port and
more). Once you finish, restart the NVMS Mobile Service (from Windows Services) and try
to reconnect with your device.
3. How do I add a NVMS Mobile server/location/site to my NVMS Mobile client?
You do this from the NVMS Mobile client. When you open it for the first time, you must add
one or more mobile servers in order to retrieve video from your cameras. Your added NVMS
Mobile servers will be listed alphabetically. You can add as many NVMS Mobile servers as
needed, as long as you have the needed log-in credentials.
4. Why is the image quality sometimes poor when I view video in the NVMS Mobile
client?
The NVMS Mobile server automatically adjusts image quality according to the available
bandwidth between the server and client. If you experience lower image quality than in the
Network Video Management System Smart Client, you might have too little bandwidth to
get full resolution images through the NVMS Mobile client. The reason for this can either be
too little upstream bandwidth from the server or too little downstream bandwidth on the
Advanced configuration
162
Network Video Management System Standard Edition 2016 R3 - Administrator Manual
client. See the Network Video Management System Smart Client User Manual which
you can download from our website http://www.sony.net/CameraSystem/NVMS/Manuals.
If you are in an area with mixed wireless bandwidth, you may notice that the image quality
improves when you enter an area with better bandwidth.
5. How do I create views?
You cannot create or configure views in the NVMS Mobile client. It uses views and related
names already created in the Network Video Management System Smart Client. If you do
not have any views set up, you can use the All cameras view to see all the cameras in
your system. You can always add more views to the Network Video Management System
Smart Client at a later time.
6. How do I add a new NVMS Mobile user?
A NVMS Mobile user is just like any other Network Video Management System user. You
add a new NVMS Mobile user the same way you normally add a new user in your
Management Application: right-click on Users in the Navigation Pane and select Add new
basic user or Add new Windows user. If you select new basic user, you must change
the server login method to Automatic or Basic Only depending on your system. You
change your server login method from the Login method drop-down menu on the
General tab of the Mobile Server entry under Servers > Mobile Servers in the
Management Application.
7. Can I control my pant-tilt-zoom (PTZ) cameras and use presets from NVMS Mobile
client?
Yes, in the NVMS Mobile client, you can control your connected PTZ cameras and use
presets in live mode.
8. How can I navigate my recordings?
Android: You can navigate through your recordings in playback mode. Select the camera
you wish to view in playback mode and choose Menu > Playback. Once you are in
playback mode you can search through your recordings using the control buttons. You also
have the option to go to a specific time by choosing Menu > Go to time. Once you have
chosen Go To time, select the date and time you want to view.
iOS: You can navigate through your recordings in playback mode. Select the camera you
wish to view in playback mode and tap Playback. Once you are in playback mode, you can
search through your recordings using the control buttons. You also have the option to go to
a specific time by choosing Menu > Go to time. Once you have chosen Go to time, select
the date and time you want to view and click Confirm.
9. Can I view live and recorded video at the same time?
Yes, in playback mode, you get a small picture-in-picture (PiP) view live from the same
camera.
10. Can I use the NVMS Mobile client without a 3G data plan?
Yes, you can use NVMS Mobile through Wi-Fi. Either locally on the same network as your
Network Video Management System or at a different location, such as a public network in a
café or a home network. Note that bandwidth on public networks vary and may affect the
image quality of the video streams.
11. Can I use the NVMS Mobile client with a 4G/LTE data plan?
Yes, you can use any data connection on your mobile device that allows you to access the
internet to connect to your Network Video Management System video management system.
Advanced configuration
163
Network Video Management System Standard Edition 2016 R3 - Administrator Manual
12. Can I add multiple servers to the NVMS Mobile client?
When you open the NVMS Mobile client for the first time, you must add one or more mobile
servers in order to retrieve video from your cameras. These mobile servers are listed
alphabetically. If you want to retrieve video from additional servers, repeat this process.
You can add as many mobile servers as needed, as long as you have the relevant log-in
credentials.
13. Why is the image quality poor when I connect to my Network Video Management
System video management system at home through Wi-Fi at my office?
Check your home internet bandwidth. Many private internet connections have different
download and upload bandwidths often described as, for example, 20 Mbit/2 Mbit. This is
because home users rarely need to upload large amounts of data to the internet, but
consume a lot of data instead. The Network Video Management System video management
system needs to send video to the NVMS Mobile client and is limited by your connection’s
upload speed. If low image quality is consistent on multiple locations where the download
speed of the NVMS Mobile client’s network is good, the problem might be solved by
upgrading the upload speed of your home internet connection.
14. Where are my screenshots saved?
Android: Snapshots are saved to your device's SD card at: /mnt/sdcard/Network
Video Management System.
iOS: Snapshots are saved to your device and can be accessed from Photos on your device.
You cannot change the default settings on neither Android nor iOS.
15. How do I avoid the security warning when I run Network Video Management
System Web Client through an HTTPS connection?
The warning appears because the server address information in the certificate is incorrect.
The connection will still be encrypted.
The self-signed certificate in the NVMS Mobile server needs to be replaced with your own
certificate matching the server address used to connect to the NVMS Mobile server. These
certificates are obtained through official certificate signing authorities such as Verisign.
Consult the chosen signing authority for more details.
NVMS Mobile server does not use Microsoft IIS. This means that instructions provided for
generating certificate signing request (CSR) files by the signing authority using the IIS is
not applicable for the NVMS Mobile server. You must manually create CSR-file using
command line certificate tools or other similar third-party application. Note that this process
should be performed by system administrators and advanced users only.
16. Does my processor support hardware-accelerated decoding?
Only newer processors from Intel support hardware accelerated decoding. Check Intel
website
http://ark.intel.com/search/advanced?s=t&MarketSegment=DT&QuickSyncVideo=true if
your processor is supported.
In the menu, make sure Technologies > Intel Quick Sync Video is set to Yes.
If your processor is supported, hardware-accelerated decoding is enabled by default. You
can see the current status in Show status in the Mobile Server Manager (see "About show
status" on page 160).
17. Does my operating system support hardware-accelerated decoding?
Only Windows 8 and Windows Server 2012 or newer are supported.
Advanced configuration
164
Network Video Management System Standard Edition 2016 R3 - Administrator Manual
Make sure you install the newest graphic drivers from the Intel website on your system.
These drivers are not available from Windows Update.
Hardware-accelerated decoding is not supported, if the mobile server is installed in a virtual
environment.
18. How do I disable hardware-accelerated decoding on the mobile server?
(Advanced)
If the processor on the mobile server supports hardware accelerated decoding, it is by
default enabled. To turn hardware-accelerated decoding off, do the following:
1. Locate the file VideoOS.MobileServer.Service.exe.config. The path is typically:
C:\Program Files\Sony\NVMS Mobile Server\VideoOS.MobileServer.Service.exe.config.
2. Open the file in Notepad or a similar text editor. If necessary, associate the file
type .config with Notepad.
3. Locate the field <add key="HardwareDecodingMode" value="Auto" />.
4. Replace the value "Auto" with "Off".
5. Save and close the file.
19. I just turned on my firewall, and now I can't connect a mobile device to my server.
Why not?
If your firewall was turned off while you installed NVMS Mobile server, you must manually
enable TCP and UDP communications.
Alarms
About alarms
The Alarms feature is a feature that uses functionality handled by the event server. It provides
central overview and control of alarms in any number of system installations throughout your
organization.
You can configure alarms to be generated based on either:
•
Internal events (system-related): for example, motion, server responding/not
responding, archiving problems, lack of disk space, and more.
•
External events (integrated): for example, plug-in events.
The Alarms feature also handles general alarms settings and alarm logging.
Configuring alarms
An alarm configuration may include:
•
Dynamic setup of alarm handling based on users access rights
•
Central overview of all components: servers, cameras, and external units
•
Setup of central logging of all incoming alarms and system information
Advanced configuration
165
Network Video Management System Standard Edition 2016 R3 - Administrator Manual
Viewing alarms
The following can play a role with regards to alarms and who can view/control/manage them and
to what degree. This is because alarms are controlled by the visibility of the object causing the
alarm.
•
Source/device visibility: if the device causing the alarm is not set to be visible to the user,
the user cannot see the alarm in the alarm list in Network Video Management System
Smart Client.
•
Right to trigger manually defined events: if manually defined events are available in your
system, these can determine if the user can trigger selected manually defined events in
Network Video Management System Smart Client.
•
External plug-ins: if any external plug-ins are set up in your system, these may control
user's rights to handle alarms.
•
General access rights: can determine whether the user is allowed to (only) view or also to
manage alarms.
Time profiles for alarms
Alarms can be based on time profiles (for alarms) (see "Add a time profile (for alarms)" on page
167). Time profiles for Alarms are periods of time to use when you create alarm definitions. You
can, for example, create a time profile for alarms covering the period from 2.30 PM till 3.30 PM on
Mondays and use that time profile to make sure that certain alarm definitions are only enabled
within this period of time.
Alarms and Network Video Management System Smart Client
Alarms appear in the alarm list in Network Video Management System Smart Client. Here, you can
view and manage alarms to ease overview and to delegate and handle alarms. You can, for
example, change an alarm status or comment on alarms.
You can integrate alarms with the map functionality (see "About maps" on page 167). The Alarms
feature is a powerful monitoring tool, providing instant overview of alarms and possible technical
problems.
Advanced configuration
166
Network Video Management System Standard Edition 2016 R3 - Administrator Manual
About maps
With maps as an integrated part of alarms, you get a physical overview of your surveillance
system: with the possibility to assign cameras to a map, you can always tell where alarms originate,
which cameras are placed where, and in what direction are they pointing. Also, you can use maps
to navigate from large perspectives to detailed perspectives, and vice versa: for example, a state
map can have hot zones (small icons on the map) that point to more detailed maps including cities,
neighborhoods, streets and floor plans.
Example: Hierarchy of maps
All user-interaction with maps, including adding and maintaining maps, takes place in Network
Video Management System Smart Client.
For detailed information, see the Network Video Management System Smart Client documentation.
In order to use maps, the Event Server service must be running. The Event Server service is
automatically included if you run a Typical installation of your surveillance server installation (see
"Install your system software" on page 27).
Add an alarm
To add/configure an alarm:
1. Expand Alarms, right-click Alarm Definition and select Create New.
2. Specify required properties (see "Alarms definition" on page 169). Click OK.
3. Save your configuration changes by clicking Save in the yellow notification bar in the
upper-right corner of the Management Application.
For a detailed overview of Alarms and how the feature works, see About alarms (on page 165).
Add a time profile (for alarms)
Time profiles are periods of time used for the Alarms feature only.
To add a time profile for an alarm, do the following:
1. Expand Alarms, right-click Time Profiles, and select Create New. The small month
overview in the top right corner of the Time Profile Properties window can help you get a
quick overview of the time periods covered by the time profile, as dates containing
specified times are highlighted in bold.
Advanced configuration
167
Network Video Management System Standard Edition 2016 R3 - Administrator Manual
2. In the calendar, select the Day View, Week View, or Month View tab, then right-click
inside the calendar and select either Add Single Time... or Add Recurring Time....
3. If you select Add Single Time..., specify Start time and End time. If the time is to cover
whole days, select the All-day event box.
—or—
If you select Add Recurring Time..., specify time range, recurrence pattern, and range of
recurrence. Click OK.
4. Save your configuration changes by clicking Save in the yellow notification bar in the
upper-right corner of the Management Application.
When you edit an existing time profile, remember that a time profile may contain more than one
time period, and that time periods may be recurring.
Analytics events are typically data received from external third-party video content analysis (VCA)
providers. An example of a VCA-based system could be an access control system.
Advanced configuration
168
Network Video Management System Standard Edition 2016 R3 - Administrator Manual
Alarms properties
Alarms definition
When you configure Alarm definitions (see "Add an alarm" on page 167), specify the following:
Enable
Enables the Alarms feature.
Name
Enter a name. The alarm's name appears whenever the alarm is
listed.
Alarm names do not have to be unique.
Description
Triggering event
Sources
Enter a description (optional).
This first list shows both system-related events and events from
plug-ins (for example access control systems or similar).
From the second list, select the event message to use when the
alarm is triggered.
Select which cameras and/or other devices the event should
originate from in order to trigger the alarm.
Your options depend upon which type of event you have selected.
Time profile
Event based
If you select Time profile, you must select when the alarm
should be enabled for triggering. If you have not defined alarm
time profiles (see "Add a time profile (for alarms)" on page 167),
you will only be able to select Always. If you have defined one or
more time profiles, you can select them from this list.
If you select Event based, you must select which events should
start and stop the alarm. Events available for selection are
hardware events defined on cameras, video servers and input
(see "Overview of events and output" on page 100). You can also
use global/manual event definitions (see "Add a manual event"
on page 103).
Note that when you select Event based, you cannot define
alarms based on outputs—only on inputs.
Time Limit
Select the time-limit within which the operator must respond to
the alarm.
Events triggered
Select the event to be triggered if the operator does not react
within the time limit specified in Time limit. This could be, for
example, sending an email, SMS or similar.
Related cameras
Select (a maximum of 15) cameras for inclusion in the alarm
definition even though they are not themselves triggering the
alarm. This can be relevant, for example, if you have selected an
external event message (such as a door being opened) as the
source of your alarm. By defining one or more cameras near the
door, you could attach the cameras' recordings of the incident to
the alarm.
Advanced configuration
169
Network Video Management System Standard Edition 2016 R3 - Administrator Manual
Select a map to associate with the alarm definition.
Related map
The selected map is automatically be shown in Network Video
Management System Smart Client whenever the alarm is listed.
This might help you to quicker identify the physical location of the
alarm.
Initial alarm owner
Select a default user responsible for the alarm. You can only
select from users allowed to view all cameras and/or other
devices selected as source(s) for the event causing the alarm.
Initial alarm priority
Select a priority (High, Medium or Low) for the alarm. Priorities
can be used for sorting purposes and workflow control in Network
Video Management System Smart Client.
Initial alarm category
Select a category to which the alarm should initially be assigned.
This could be, for example, Building01, Burglary, ElevatorEast
or similar, depending on which categories have been defined.
Event triggered by alarm
Define an event to be triggered by the alarm in Network Video
Management System Smart Client (if needed).
Auto-close alarm
Select if the alarm should automatically be closed upon a
particular event. This is possible for alarms triggered by some
(but not all) events.
See also Alarm data settings (on page 170) and Alarm sound settings (see "Sound settings" on
page 171) for further information on how to configure alarm settings.
Alarm data settings
When you configure alarm data settings, specify the following:
Alarm Data Levels tab, Priorities
Name
Description
Level
Add new priorities with level numbers of your choosing or
use/edit the default priority levels (numbers 1, 2 or 3). Use these
priority levels to configure the Initial alarm priority setting (see
"Alarms definition" on page 169).
Name
Type a name for the entity. You can create as many as you like.
Sound
Select the sound to be associated with the alarm. Use one if the
default sounds or add more in Sound Settings (on page 171).
Advanced configuration
170
Network Video Management System Standard Edition 2016 R3 - Administrator Manual
Alarm Data Levels tab, States
Name
Description
Level
Add new states with level numbers of your choosing. The state
levels are only visible in the Alarm List in Network Video
Management System Smart Client. You cannot edit or reuse the
default state levels 1, 4, 9 and 11.
Name
Type a name for the entity. You can create as many as you like.
Alarm Data Levels tab, Categories
Name
Description
Level
Add new categories with level numbers of your choosing. These
category levels are used to configure the Initial alarm category
setting (see "Alarms definition" on page 169).
Name
Type a name for the entity. You can create as many as you like.
Alarm List Configuration tab
In Available columns, use > to select which columns should be available in the Network Video
Management System Smart Client Alarm List. Use < to clear selection. When done, Selected
columns should contain the items to be included.
Reasons for Closing tab
Name
Description
Enable
Select to enable that all alarms must be assigned a reason for
closing before they can be closed.
Reason
Add reasons for closing that the user can choose between when
closing alarms. Examples could be "Solved-Trespasser" or
"False Alarm". You can create as many as you like.
Advanced configuration
171
Network Video Management System Standard Edition 2016 R3 - Administrator Manual
Sound settings
When you configure Sound Settings, specify the following:
Select the sound to be associated with the alarm. The list of
sounds contain a number of default Windows sounds. These
cannot be edited. However, you can add new sounds of the file
type .wav, but only if these are encoded in Pulse Code Modulation
(PCM).
Sounds
Add
Remove
Test
Although the default sounds are standard Windows sound-files,
local Windows settings might cause these to sound different on
different machines. Some users might also have deleted one or
more of these sound-files and will therefore be unable to play
them. To ensure an identical sound all over, you should import
and use your own .wav files encoded in PCM.
Add sounds to the system. Browse to the sound to upload one or
several .wav files.
Remove a selected sound from the list of manually added sounds.
You cannot remove default sounds.
Lets you test the sound. In the list, select the sound. The sound
is played once.
Time profile
When you configure Time profiles (see "Add a time profile (for alarms)" on page 167), specify the
following:
Name
Type a name for the time profile.
Description
Enter a description (optional).
Add Single Time
Right-click the calendar and select Add Single Time. Specify
Start time and End time. If the time covers whole days, select
All-day event.
Add Recurring Time
Right-click the calendar and select Add Recurring Time. Specify
the time range, recurrence pattern, and range of recurrence.
Right-click the calendar and select Edit Time. Specify Start time
and End time. If the time covers whole days, select All-day
event.
Edit Time
Advanced configuration
When you edit an existing time profile, remember that a time
profile may contain more than one time period, and that time
periods may be recurring. If you want your time profile to contain
additional periods of time, add more single times or recurring
times.
172
Network Video Management System Standard Edition 2016 R3 - Administrator Manual
Options
About automatic device discovery
Automatic device discovery allows you to automatically add hardware devices to your system as
soon as you connect these to your network. When you enable automatic device discovery, your
system configures and sets up hardware devices automatically without the need for any user
interaction, making the hardware devices instantly accessible in Network Video Management
System Smart Client after the automatic installation has completed.
Note that:
•
Not all hardware devices support automatic device discovery.
•
Hardware devices respond differently to automatic device discovery. The system adds some
hardware devices (such as Axis models P3301 and P3304) to the system automatically,
while you must turn off some devices from other vendors (such as Sony models
SNC-EB520, EM520 and E521) and back on again before they are automatically added to
your system.
•
If your system is not online, remember to activate your hardware device licenses offline.
Change default file paths
To change any of the default file paths:
1. If you want to change the configuration path, stop all services. This step is not necessary if
you want to change the default recording or archiving path.
2. Go to Options > Default File Paths...
You can now overwrite the necessary paths. Alternatively, click the browse button next to
the field and browse to the location. For the default recording path, you can only specify a
path to a folder on a local drive.
If you change the default recording or archiving paths and there are existing recordings at
the old locations, you must select whether you want to move the recordings to the new
locations, leave them at the old locations, or delete them. Sony recommends that you
choose to move the recordings to a new location.
3. Once changes are confirmed, restart all services.
Options
173
Network Video Management System Standard Edition 2016 R3 - Administrator Manual
Settings
General
Language
The Management Application is available in several languages. From the list of languages, select
the language you want to use. Restart the Management Application to make the change of
language take effect.
User Interface
You can change the way the Management Application behaves.
Camera preview
Specify if you want to show live video or a snapshot when you
preview a camera in Management Application, or if you do not
want previewing at all.
Specify how you want the Management Application to behave for
a number of actions, you and other Management Application
users perform.
The Management Application asks you to confirm many of the
actions. If you think this is not necessary, you can change the
behavior of the Management Application to not ask you again.
Examples of actions you can change:
•
When you attempt to delete a hardware device, should the
Management Application ask you to confirm that you want to
delete the hardware device, or should it delete the hardware
device straight away without asking?
•
Depending on the system you are using, you may have a limit
on the number of cameras you can use in your system. Select
if the system should warn you if you add more cameras than
the allowed number of cameras.
•
If your system should show live video when you preview
camera or if you would rather see a snapshot or no preview of
the camera.
Behavior settings
Restore Default Settings
Options
Click this button if you want to restore all behavior settings to
their default values.
174
Network Video Management System Standard Edition 2016 R3 - Administrator Manual
Connecting Hardware Devices
Automatic device discovery
Automatic device discovery (see "About automatic device discovery" on page 173) is turned off by
default in your system. Select the check box to enable this functionality.
If the discovered cameras must use another user name and password besides the camera's default
user name and password, select the Use the camera's default user name and password as
well as the following credentials check box and type the relevant credentials.
Not all devices support automatic device discovery. If your system does not detect your devices
and add them to your system, you must manually add the device.
Synchronize time on connected hardware devices
To ensure that the time stamp on connected hardware devices and the system is the same, enable
the use of time servers (see "About time servers" on page 11). If you hardware device do not link
up against a time server that ensures that the time on the hardware devices and the system is
synchronized, you risk that the system stops recording from the hardware devices all together.
Setting
Use the recording server as
a time server
(Recommended)
Description
The default system setting if you have upgraded from a previous
installation of the system's software.
Use the recording server to synchronize time between hardware
devices and your system.
Sony recommends that you use this setting.
Use this Network Time
Protocol (NTP) server
Use an NTP server for time-synchronization instead of using the
recording server.
You must type the exact address of the NTP server to be able to
use it. Sony recommends that you only use this setting if you are
an experienced system administrator.
The default setting if you have upgraded from a previous
installation of the system' software.
If you do not want any time synchronization to take place between
Do not synchronize time on
hardware devices and the system, use this setting.
connected hardware devices
Note that your hardware devices may stop recording if the system
notices a constant time drift between the hardware devices and the
system.
IP address assignment settings
The system includes three different settings for assigning IP addresses to your hardware devices
when you connect them to the network. Each of the settings have their own advantages and
disadvantages. Note that not all cameras support the use of DHCP servers.
Options
175
Network Video Management System Standard Edition 2016 R3 - Administrator Manual
Setting
Use of a DHCP
server to assign IP
addresses to
connected devices
Description
Use a Dynamic Host
Configuration Protocol
(DHCP) server to
automatically assign IP
addresses to devices you
connect to the system.
Advantage
Disadvantage
The DHCP servers keep
track of available IP
addresses and add
them to the devices
when they are added
to your network.
Devices can change IP
addresses so that the IP
You can move devices
addresses in the
from one network to
configuration do not
another without having
match anymore.
to reconfigure them.
If your system does not
use a DHCP server,
devices keep their
pre-assigned IP addresses
or use a self-configured IP This is the default
system setting if you
address which might not
have upgraded from a
work.
previous installation of
the system's software.
Do not assign an IP
address when
connecting a device
No IP addresses are
assigned to devices
connected to the system.
The devices keep their
current setup, for
example having a static
IP address or a
DHCP-assigned IP
address.
Assign a static IP
address to
connected devices
from this range:
A static IP address from
your indicated range is
Assigned IP addresses
assigned to each
never change.
individual device added to
the system.
Control everything
related to assigning IP
addresses yourself.
This is the default
system setting if you
have upgraded from a
previous installation of
the system's software.
You must keep track of
available IP addresses
yourself.
You must reconfigure all
devices to change
network as devices
must be reconfigured
before you can move
them to another
network.
A Dynamic Host Configuration Protocol (DHCP) server is a standardized network protocol used on
IP networks for dynamically distributing network configuration parameters. With DHCP, devices
request IP addresses and networking parameters automatically from the DHCP server. The use of a
DHCP server reduces the need for a network administrator or a user to configure such settings
manually.
Default File Paths
Your system uses a number of default file paths. You can change the path of these if you need to.
All new cameras you add use this path by default for storing
recordings.
Default recording path for
new cameras
Options
If required, you can change individual cameras' recording paths
as part of their individual configuration (see "Recording and
archiving paths" on page 87), but you can also change the default
recording path so all new cameras you add use a path of your
choice.
176
Network Video Management System Standard Edition 2016 R3 - Administrator Manual
All new cameras you add use this path by default for archiving
(see "About archiving" on page 116).
Default archiving path for
new cameras
Configuration path
If required, you can change individual cameras' archiving paths
as part of their individual configuration, but you can also change
the default recording path so all new cameras you add use a path
of your choice. Note that camera-specific archiving paths are not
relevant if you use dynamic path selection (see "Dynamic path
selection (properties)" on page 69) for archiving.
The default path used for storing your system configuration.
Audio Recording
Specify the default setting for audio recording when you add new cameras to the system.
Never
The system never records audio from your cameras.
Only when recording video
The system only records audio from your cameras when your
system is recording video.
Always
The system always records audio for your cameras.
You can change the setting later for each camera individually.
Analytics Events (properties)
Analytics Events let you specify the following:
Enabled
Enable the analytics event feature.
Specify the port used by this service. Default port is 9090.
Port
Make sure that relevant VCA tool providers also use this port
number. If you change the port number, make sure that VCA tool
providers change their port number accordingly.
Specify whether events from all IP addresses/host names are
accepted, or only events from IP addresses/host names specified
in a list:
Events allowed from:
All network addresses or
Specified network addresses
Options
In the Address list specify a list of trusted IP addresses/host
names that you want this service to recognize. The list is used to
filter incoming data so that only events from certain IP
addresses/host names are allowed. Both Domain Name System
(DNS) and IPv4 address formats are allowed in the list.
You have two ways of adding addresses to the list:
•
Manually: type the required IP address/host name in the
address list. Repeat for each required address.
•
Import an external list: read below.
177
Network Video Management System Standard Edition 2016 R3 - Administrator Manual
Import
Click the Import... button to browse for the required external list
of addresses. To import an external list, save the list in a .txt file
format. Each IP address or host name must appear on a separate
line in the file.
Event Server Settings
The event server has a number of settings that can change its behavior. You can specify the
following Event Server settings:
Specify the number of days you want the system to keep closed
alarms. Closed alarms are in the states Closed, Ignore, and
Reject.
Keep closed alarms for
This value is normally set to a low number to keep the capacity
requirements low, but you can define any number up to 99999
days, dependant on server space.
To keep closed alarms indefinitely, use the value 0 (dependant on
server space).
Specify the number of days you want the system to keep all other
alarms, meaning alarms not in the states Closed, Ignore, and
Reject.
Keep all other alarms for
This value is normally set to a somewhat higher number, such as
30 days, but you can define any number up to 99999 days,
dependant on server space.
To keep all other alarms indefinitely, use the value 0 (dependant
on server space).
Keep logs for
Log server communication
Specify the number of days you want the system to keep the
Alarms log. Default is 30 days.
To keep logs indefinitely, use the value 0 (dependant on server
space).
Specify if you want to save a separate log for server
communication in addition to the regular log for the number of
days specified.
Important: Alarms often have associated video recordings. While the alarm information itself is
stored on the event server, the associated video recordings are fetched from the relevant
surveillance system server when users wish to view them. Therefore, if it is vital that you have
access to video recordings from all your alarms, make sure that video recordings from relevant
cameras are stored on relevant surveillance system servers for at least as long as you intend to
keep alarms on the event server.
Options
178
Network Video Management System Standard Edition 2016 R3 - Administrator Manual
System maintenance
Backing up and restoring configuration
About backup and restore of configuration
Sony recommends that you make regular backups of your system configuration (cameras,
schedules, views, and so on) as a disaster recovery measure.
While it is rare to lose your configuration, it can happen under unfortunate circumstances. Luckily,
it takes only a minute to back up your existing configuration.
Back up system configuration
In the following, Sony assumes that you have not changed your system's default configuration path
(see "Default File Paths" on page 176), which is C:\Program Data\Sony\Sony Surveillance on
servers running all supported operating systems. If you have changed the default configuration
path, you must take your changes into consideration when using the method described in the
following.
The backup described here is a backup of your entire surveillance system setup including log files,
event configuration, restore points, view groups as well as Management Application and Network
Video Management System Smart Client configuration. Alternatively, you can export your
configuration as a backup (see "Export and import Management Application configuration" on page
183), which is limited to the Management Application configuration.
To back up:
1. Make a copy of the folder C:\Program Data\Sony\Sony Surveillance and all of its
content.
2. Open the folder C:\Program Files\Sony\Sony Surveillance\devices, and verify if the
file devices.ini exists. If the file exists, make a copy of it. The file exists if you have
configured video properties for certain types of cameras. For such cameras, changes to the
properties are stored in the file rather than on the camera itself.
3. Store the copies away from the server, so that they are not affected if the server is
damaged, stolen or otherwise affected.
Remember that a backup is a snapshot of your system configuration at the time of backing up. If
you later change your configuration, your backup does not reflect the most recent changes.
Therefore, back up your system configuration regularly. When you back up your configuration as
described, the backup includes restore points. This allows you to not only restore the backed-up
configuration, but also to revert to an earlier point in that configuration if you need to.
Restore system configuration
1. If you use the system on a server running any supported operating system, copy the
content of the backed-up Sony Surveillance folder into C:\Program Data\Sony\Sony
Surveillance.
System maintenance
179
Network Video Management System Standard Edition 2016 R3 - Administrator Manual
2. If you backed up the file devices.ini, copy the file into C:\Program Files\Sony\Sony
Surveillance\devices.
Back up and restore alarm and map configuration
It is important that you regularly back up your alarm and map configurations. You do this by
backing up the event server, which handles your alarm and map configuration as well as the
Microsoft® SQL Server Express database, which stores your alarm data. This enables you to
restore your alarm and map configuration in a possible disaster recovery scenario. Backing up also
has the added benefit that it flushes the SQL Server Express database’s transaction log.
When you back up and restore alarm and/or map configuration, you must do it in the following
order:
Prerequisites
•
You must have administrator rights on the SQL Server Express database when you
back up or restore your alarm configuration database on the SQL Server Express. Once you
are done backing up or restoring, you only need to be a database owner of the SQL Server
Express database.
•
Microsoft® SQL Server Management Studio Express, a tool you can download for free
from the Microsoft website http://www.microsoft.com/downloads. Among its many features
for managing SQL Server Express databases are some easy-to-use backup and restoration
features. Download and install the tool on your existing surveillance system server and on
a possible future surveillance system server (you need it for backup as well as restoration).
Step 1: Stop the Event Server service
Stop the event server service to prevent configuration changes from being made:
1. On your surveillance system server, click Start > Control Panel > Administrative Tools
> Services.
2. Right-click the Event Server, click Stop.
This is important since any changes made to alarm configurations—between the time you create a
backup and the time you restore it—are lost. If you make changes after the backup, you must
make a new backup. Note that the system does not generate alarms while the Event Server service
is stopped. It is important that you remember to start the service again once you have finished
backing up the SQL database.
Step 2: Back up alarms data in SQL Server Express database
If you do not have SQL Server Management Studio Express, you can download it for free from
the Microsoft website http://www.microsoft.com/downloads.
1. Open Microsoft SQL Server Management Studio Express from Windows' Start menu by
selecting All Programs > Microsoft SQL Server 2008 > SQL Server Management
Studio Express.
2. When you open the tool, you are prompted to connect to a server. Specify the name of the
required SQL Server and connect with administrator user credentials. You do not have to
type the name of the SQL server: if you click inside the Server name field and select
<Browse for more...>, you can select the SQL Server from a list instead.
System maintenance
180
Network Video Management System Standard Edition 2016 R3 - Administrator Manual
3. Once connected, you see a tree structure in the Object Explorer in the left part of the
window. Expand the SQL Server item, then the Databases item, which contains your
entire alarm configuration.
4. Right-click the VIDEOOSDB database, and select Tasks > Back Up...
5. On the Back Up Database dialog's General page, do the following:
•
Under Source verify that the selected database is VIDEOOSDB and that the
backup type is Full.
•
Under Destination A destination path for the backup is automatically suggested.
Verify that the path is satisfactory. If not, remove the suggested path, and add
another path of your choice.
6. On the Back Up Database dialog's Options page, under Reliability, select Verify
backup when finished and Perform checksum before writing to media.
7. Click OK to begin the backup. When backup is finished, you see a confirmation.
8. Exit Microsoft SQL Server Management Studio Express.
Step 3: Reinstall your system
Do not install your surveillance software on a mounted drive. A mounted drive is a drive that is
attached to an empty folder on an NTFS (NT File System) volume, with a label or name instead of a
drive letter. If you use mounted drives, critical system features may not work as intended. You do
not, for example, receive any warnings if the system runs out of disk space.
Before you start: Shut down any existing surveillance software.
1. Run the installation file. Depending on your security settings, you may receive one or more
security warnings. Click the Run button if you receive a warning.
2. When the installation wizard starts, select language for the installer and then click
Continue.
3. Select if you want to install a trial version of your system or indicate the location of your
software license file.
4. Read and accept the license agreement, and indicate if you want to participate in the Sony
data collection program.
5. Select Typical or Custom installation. If you select Custom installation, you can select
application language, which features to install and where to install them. Let the installation
wizard complete.
You can now begin to configure your system, see Configure your system in Management
Application (see "Configure the system in the Management Application" on page 31).
Step 4: Restore alarms data in SQL Server Express database
Luckily, most users never need to restore their backed-up alarm data, but if you ever need to, do
the following:
1. In the Windows Start menu, open Microsoft SQL Server Management Studio Express.
2. Connect to a server. Specify the name of the required SQL Server, and connect using the
user account the database was created with.
System maintenance
181
Network Video Management System Standard Edition 2016 R3 - Administrator Manual
3. In the Object Explorer on the left, expand SQL Server > Databases, right-click the
VIDEOOSDB database, and then select Tasks > Restore > Database...
4. In the Restore Database dialog, on the General page, under Source for restore, select
From device and click <Browse for more...>, to the right of the field. In the Specify
Backup dialog, make sure that File is selected in the Backup media list. Click Add.
5. In the Locate Backup File dialog, locate and select your backup file VIDEOOSDB.bak.
Then click OK. The path to your backup file is now listed in the Specify Backup dialog.
6. Back on the Restore Database dialog's General page, your backup is now listed under
Select the backup sets to restore. Make sure you select the backup by selecting the
check box in the Restore column.
7. Now go to the Restore Database dialog's Options page, and select Overwrite the
existing database. Leave the other options as they are, and then click OK to begin the
restoration. When the restore is finished, you see a confirmation.
8. Exit Microsoft SQL Server Management Studio Express.
Note: If you get an error message telling you that the database is in use, try exiting Microsoft SQL
Server Management Studio Express completely, then repeat steps 1-8.
Step 5: Restart the Event Server service
During the restore process, the Event Server service is stopped to prevent configuration changes
being made until you are done. Remember to start the service again:
1. On your surveillance system server, click Start > Control Panel > Administrative Tools
> Services.
2. Right-click the Event Server, click Start.
About the SQL Server Express transaction log and reasons for flushing it
Each time a change in the system's alarm data take place, the SQL Server logs the change in its
transaction log. The transaction log is essentially a security feature that makes it possible to roll
back and undo changes to the SQL Server Express database. The SQL Server by default stores its
transaction log indefinitely, and, therefore, the transaction log builds up more and more entries
over time.
The SQL Server's transaction log is by default located on the system drive, and if the transaction
log just keeps growing, it may in the end prevent Windows from running properly. Flushing the
SQL Server's transaction log from time to time is therefore a good idea, however flushing it does
not in itself make the transaction log file smaller, rather it prevents it from growing out of control.
Your system does not, however, automatically flush the SQL Server's transaction log at specific
intervals. This is because users have different needs. Some want to be able to undo changes for a
very long time, others do not care.
You can do several things on the SQL Server itself to keep the size of the transaction log down,
including truncating and/or shrinking the transaction log (for numerous articles on this topic, go to
support.microsoft.com http://support.microsoft.com and search for SQL Server transaction log).
However, backing up the system's database is generally a better option since it flushes the SQL
Server's transaction log and gives you the security of being able to restore your system's alarm
data in case something unexpected happens.
System maintenance
182
Network Video Management System Standard Edition 2016 R3 - Administrator Manual
Export and import Management Application configuration
You can export the current configuration of your Management Application, either as a safety
measure in order to have a backup file of your configuration, or as a clone allowing you to use a
similar Management Application configuration elsewhere. You can, at a later time, import
previously exported Management ApplicationManagement Application configurations.
Export Management Application configuration as backup
With this option, all relevant Management Application configuration files are combined into one
single .xml file, which you can specify a location for. Note that if there are unsaved changes to your
configuration, these are automatically saved when you export the configuration.
1. In the File menu, select Export Configuration - Backup.
2. Browse to the location at which you want to store the exported configuration, specify a
suitable file name, and click Save.
If you intend to set up an identical version of your surveillance system elsewhere, do not export
your configuration as backup, since this may lead to the same device information being used twice,
in which case clients may get the following error message: Application is not able to start
because two (or more) cameras are using the same name or ID. Instead, export your
configuration as a clone. When you export as a clone, the export takes into account the fact that
you are not using the exact same physical cameras, etc. even though your new system may
otherwise be identical to your existing one.
Note that there is a difference between this Management Application configuration backup and the
system configuration backup done from the Sony Surveillance folder because these are two
different things. The backup described here is limited to a backup of the Management Application
configuration. The type of system configuration backup done from the Sony Surveillance folder is a
backup of your entire surveillance system setup (including, among other things, log files, event
configuration, restore points, view groups as well as the Management Application and Network
Video Management System Smart Client configuration).
Export Management Application configuration as clone
With this option, all relevant Management Application configuration files are collected, and GUIDs
(Globally Unique IDentifiers, unique 128-bit numbers used for identifying individual system
components, such as cameras) are marked for later replacement. GUIDs are marked for later
replacement because they refer to specific components (cameras and so on). Even though you
wish to use the cloned configuration for setting up a new similar system using similar types of
cameras, the new system does not use the exact same physical cameras as the cloned system.
When you use the cloned configuration later in a new system, the GUIDs are replaced with GUIDs
representing the specific components of the new system.
After you have marked GUIDs for replacement, the configuration files are combined into one
single .xml file, which you can then save at a location specified by you. Note that if there are
unsaved changes to your configuration, they are automatically saved when you export the
configuration.
1. In the File menu, select Export Configuration - Clone.
2. Browse to the location at which you want to store the exported configuration, specify a
suitable file name, and click Save.
System maintenance
183
Network Video Management System Standard Edition 2016 R3 - Administrator Manual
Import previously exported Management Application configuration
The same import method is used regardless of whether the Management Application configuration
was exported as a backup or a clone.
1. In the File menu, select Import Configuration.
2. Browse to the location from which you want to import the configuration, select the relevant
configuration file, and click Open.
3. Only relevant if the system into which you import the configuration contains devices
(cameras, etc.) which are not present in the imported configuration: you are asked
whether you want to delete or keep recordings from affected devices. If you want to keep
the recordings, note that they are not accessible until you add the affected devices to the
system again. Select the option you need, and click OK.
4. Expand Advanced Configuration > Services.
5. For the Recording Server and Image Server services respectively, click the Restart button.
Restarting the two services applies the imported Management Application configuration.
Restore system configuration from a restore point
Restore points allow you to return to a previous configuration state. Each time you apply a
configuration change in the Management Application, a new restore point is created.
All restore points in the current and previous five sessions are stored and can be selected again. A
new session begins each time you start the Management Application as well as each time you save
the whole configuration. For sessions older than the last five sessions, only the latest restore point
of each session is stored. With the Number of old sessions to keep field, you can control how
many old sessions are kept.
When you select to restore a configuration from a restore point, the configuration from the selected
restore point is applied and used once the services are restarted.
If you have added new cameras or other devices to the system after the restore point was created,
they are missing if you load the restore point. This is because they were not in the system when
the restore point was created. In such cases, you are notified and must decide what to do with
recordings from the affected devices.
1. From the File menu, select Load Configuration from Restore Point...
2. In the left part of the Restore Points dialog, select the relevant restore point.
3. Click the Load Restore Point button.
4. If you are sure that you want to overwrite the current configuration with the one from the
selected restore point, click OK.
5. Only relevant if the current configuration contains cameras or other devices which were not
present in the selected restore point: you are asked whether you want to delete or keep
recordings from affected devices. If you keep the recordings, note that you cannot access
them until you add the affected devices to your system again. Select the relevant option,
and click OK.
6. Click OK in the Restore Points dialog.
7. Expand Advanced Configuration, and select Services.
System maintenance
184
Network Video Management System Standard Edition 2016 R3 - Administrator Manual
8. For the Recording Server and Image Server services respectively, click the Restart button.
When the two services are restarted, the configuration from the selected restore point is
applied.
Note: When you select a restore point, you can see information about the configuration state at
the selected point in time in the right part of the dialog. This can help you select the best possible
restore point.
Importing changes to configuration
About importing changes to configuration
You can import changes to a configuration. This can be relevant if you install many similar systems,
for example in a chain of shops where the same types of server, hardware devices, and cameras
are used in each shop. In such cases, you can use an existing configuration as a template for the
other installations.
Since such installations are not exactly the same, as the hardware devices and cameras are of the
same type, but they are not physically the same, and therefore they have different MAC addresses,
there is an easy way of importing changes to the template configuration. You can import changes
about hardware devices and cameras as comma-separated values (CSV) from a file.
See Import changes to configuration (on page 186) for a step-by-step guide and About required
fields for CSV files when you import changes to configurations (on page 185) for which fields you
must include in the CSV files.
When you import changes, no hardware detection takes place nor does the software change the
camera's hardware capabilities. For example, if you replace a PTZ camera with a non-PTZ camera,
the software continues to show the replaced camera as a PTZ camera.
About required fields for CSV files when you import
changes to configurations
The CSV file must have a header line (determining what each value on the following lines is about),
and the following lines must each contain information about one hardware device only. The field
names are case sensitive, so you should ensure that you have written the fields exactly as shown
below.
For each hardware device, the following information is required:
HardwareOldMacAddress
Used to find the device that is going to have its properties
changed. This is a mandatory field that you must enter in order to
be able to import changes to the configuration from a CSV file.
HardwareNewMacAddress
The new IP address for the hardware device.
HardwareAddress
The IP address of the hardware device.
HardwarePort
The port for the hardware device.
HardwareUserName
The user name for hardware device's administrator account.
HardwarePassword
The password for hardware device's administrator account.
System maintenance
185
Network Video Management System Standard Edition 2016 R3 - Administrator Manual
HardwareOldMacAddress
HardwareDriverID
Used to find the device that is going to have its properties
changed. This is a mandatory field that you must enter in order to
be able to import changes to the configuration from a CSV file.
If cameras and server are offline: specify a HardwareDriverID
for each hardware device you want to add.
Example: ACTi ACD-2100 105 indicates that you should use
105 as the ID if adding an ACTi ACD-2100 hardware device.
When you import changes, no hardware detection takes place and no hardware functionality is
changed. For example, if you replace a PTZ device with a device that does not have PTZ
functionality, the new device still lists as a PTZ device.
The following applies for the information present in CSV files:
•
The first line of the CSV file must contain the headers, and following lines must contain
information about one hardware device each
•
Separators can be commas, semicolons or tabs, but you cannot mix them
•
All lines must contain valid values. All camera names, user names and similar items must
be unique, and cannot contain any of the following special characters: <
> & ' " \ / : * ? | [ ]
•
There is no fixed order of values, and you can omit optional parameters entirely
Import changes to configuration
1. From the menu bar, select File > Import Changes to Configuration...
2. Select Online verification if the new hardware devices and cameras listed in your CSV file
are connected to the server and you want to verify that you can reach them.
3. Point to the CSV file, and click the Import Configuration from File button.
See also About importing changes to configuration (on page 185).
System maintenance
186
Network Video Management System Standard Edition 2016 R3 - Administrator Manual
Glossary of Terms
A
Administrator
1) System administrator. 2) In previous
versions of your system: the main application
used by system administrators for configuring
the surveillance system server. Now called
the Management Application.
Analytics Events
Analytics events are data received from an
external third-party video content analysis
(VCA) provider. An example of a VCA-based
system is an access control system. Analytics
events integrates seamlessly with the
Alarms feature.
Aspect ratio
The height/width relationship of an image.
ATM
C
Carousel
A feature for displaying video from several
cameras, one after the other, in a single
camera position. The required cameras and
the intervals between changes are specified
by the system administrator. The carousel
feature is available in Network Video
Management System Smart Client.
Codec
A technology for compressing and
decompressing audio and video data, for
example, in an exported AVI file. MPEG and
Indeo are examples of frequently used
codecs.
CSV
Comma-separated values data format that
stores tabular data, where the lines represent
rows in a table and commas define the
columns, in a simple file. For example, data
about cameras may appear as
comma-separated values in a .csv file, which
you can then import into your system. It is
an effective method if you set up several
similar systems.
Automatic teller machine—machine that
dispenses money when a personal coded card
is used.
D
AVI
Device
A popular file format for video. Files in this
format carry the .avi file extension.
In an Network Video Management System
surveillance system: a camera, video encoder,
input device, or output device connected to a
recording server.
B
Base license
A license that gives you permission to use the
software of an Network Video Management
System VMS product and/or Network Video
Management System add-on product.
Glossary of Terms
Device changes without
activation
A threshold on the number of hardware
devices you can replace or add if your
Network Video Management System is offline
before you must make a manual license
activation.
187
Network Video Management System Standard Edition 2016 R3 - Administrator Manual
F
DirectX
A Windows extension providing advanced
multimedia capabilities.
Fisheye
DNS
A type of lens that allows the creation and
viewing of fisheye images.
Domain Name System—system allowing
translation between alphabetic host names
(for example, mycomputer) or domain names
(for example, www.mydomain.com) and
numeric IP addresses (for example,
192.168.212.2). Many people find alphabetic
names easier to remember than numeric IP
addresses.
Driver
A program used for
controlling/communicating with a device.
DST
Daylight saving time: temporarily advancing
of clocks during the summer so that
afternoons have more daylight and mornings
have less.
Dual stream
Some cameras support two independent
streams (which can be sent to the recording
server): one for live viewing and another for
playback purposes. Each stream has its own
resolution, encoding, and frame rate.
E
Event Server
A server that stores and handles incoming
alarm data and events from all surveillance
system servers. The Event Server enables
powerful monitoring and provides an instant
overview of alarms and possible technical
problems within your systems.
Glossary of Terms
FPS
Frames per second—measurement indicating
the amount of information contained in a
motion video. Each frame represents a still
image, but when frames are displayed in
succession, the illusion of motion is created.
The higher the FPS, the smoother the motion
appears. Note, however, that a high FPS may
also lead to a large file size when video is
saved.
Frame rate
A measurement indicating the amount of
information contained in motion
video—typically measured in FPS.
G
Generic events
Your system can receive and analyze input in
the form of TCP or UDP data packages which,
if they match specified criteria, you can use
to generate events. Such events are called
generic events.
GOP
Group of pictures: individual frames grouped
together, forming a video-motion sequence.
Grace period
When you install and configure your system
and add recording servers and cameras, the
different devices run in a trial period until you
activate your licenses. This period of trial is
the grace period. You must activate you
licenses before the grace period expires or
your system will stop working. If your system
is online, your licenses are activated
automatically.
188
Network Video Management System Standard Edition 2016 R3 - Administrator Manual
GUID
Hotspot
Globally unique identifier—unique 128-bit
number used to identify components on a
Windows system.
Particular position for viewing enlarged
and/or high quality video in Network Video
Management System Smart Client.
H
I
H.264
I/O
A standard for compressing and
decompressing video data (a codec). H.264 is
a codec that compresses video more
effectively than older codecs, and it provides
more flexibility for use in a variety of network
environments.
Input/Output: refers to the communication
between a computer and a person. Inputs are
the signals or data received by the system
and outputs are the signals or data sent from
it.
Hardware device
When you add a digital camera to your
system, you are not adding the camera itself
only, but rather hardware devices. Hardware
devices have their own IP addresses or host
names. Being IP-based, your system
primarily identifies units based on their IP
addresses or host names.
Even though each hardware device has its
own IP address or host name, you can attach
several cameras, microphones and speakers
to a single hardware device and share the
same IP address or host name. This is
typically the case with cameras attached to
video encoder devices.
You can configure each camera, microphone
and similar channels on the hardware device
individually, even when several of them are
attached to a single hardware device.
Hardware device license
A license that gives you permission to run a
camera or encoder on your Network Video
Management System. If you want to use the
video push feature on a mobile device or
tablet, you also need a hardware device
license per device.
I-frame
Short name for intra-frame. Used in the
MPEG standard for digital video compression.
An I-frame is a single frame stored at
specified intervals. The I-frame records the
entire view of the camera, whereas the
frames that follow (P-frames) record only the
pixels that change. This helps greatly reduce
the size of MPEG files. An I-frame is similar to
a keyframe.
Image Server
A service that handles access to the system
for remote users logging in with Network
Video Management System Smart Client.
The Image Server service does not require
separate hardware as it runs in the
background on the surveillance system's
server. The Image Server service is not
configured separately but is configured
through the system's Management
Application.
IPIX
A technology that allows the creation and
viewing of panomorph Fisheye images.
Host
A computer connected to a TCP/IP network. A
host has its own IP address, but
may—depending on network
configuration—also have a host name to
make it easily identifiable.
Glossary of Terms
189
Network Video Management System Standard Edition 2016 R3 - Administrator Manual
J
JPEG
(Also JPG) Joint Photographic Experts
Group—widely used lossy compression
technique for images.
K
Keyframe
Used in the MPEG standard for digital video
compression, a keyframe is a single frame
stored at specified intervals. The keyframe
records the entire view of the camera,
whereas the frames between the keyframes
record only the pixels that change. This helps
greatly reduce the size of MPEG files.
M
MAC address
Media Access Control address—12-character
hexadecimal number uniquely identifying
each device on a network.
Manual events
You can generate an event manually from the
client. These events are called manual
events.
Master/Slave
A setup of servers where one server (the
master server) is of higher importance than
the remaining servers (the slave servers).
With a master/slave setup in your system,
you can combine several surveillance system
servers and extend the number of cameras
you can use beyond the maximum allowed
number of cameras for a single server.
In such a setup, clients still have a single
point of contact: they connect to the master
server but also get access, transparently, to
cameras and recordings on the slave servers.
MJPEG
Motion JPEG—compressed video format
where each frame is a separately compressed
JPEG image. The method used is quite similar
to the I-frame method used for MPEG, but no
interframe prediction is used. This allows for
somewhat easier editing, and makes
compression independent of the amount of
motion.
Monitor
1) A computer screen. 2) An application used
in previous versions of Sony - Network Video
Management System Smart Client for
recording and displaying video. The Monitor
application has been discontinued.
MPEG
Compression standards and file formats for
digital video developed by the Moving
Pictures Experts Group. MPEG standards use
so-called lossy compression as they store
only the changes between frames, removing
often considerable amounts of redundant
information. Keyframes stored at specified
intervals record the entire view of the camera,
whereas the frames that follow record only
pixels that change. This helps greatly reduce
the size of MPEG files.
N
NTLM
In a Windows network, NT LAN Manager is a
network authentication protocol.
P
Panomorph
A type of lens that allows the creation and
viewing of Fisheye-technology images.
Pan-tilt-zoom (PTZ)
Pan-tilt-zoom. A highly movable and flexible
type of camera.
Glossary of Terms
190
Network Video Management System Standard Edition 2016 R3 - Administrator Manual
P-frame
POS
Predictive frame—the MPEG standard for
digital video compression uses P-frames
together with I-frames. An I-frame, also
known as a keyframe, is a single frame
stored at specified intervals. The I-frame
records the entire view of the camera,
whereas the frames that follow (the
P-frames) record only the pixels that change.
This helps greatly reduce the size of MPEG
files.
(Also PoS) Point of sale: the physical place
where a sale is made, for example, at the
cash register.
PIN
Personal identification number (or personal
identity number)—number used to identify
and authenticate users.
Ping
A computer network administration utility
used to determine whether an IP address is
available, by sending a small amount of data
to see if it responds. The word ping was
chosen because it mirrors the sound of a
sonar. You send the ping command using a
Windows command prompt.
Polling
Regularly checking the state of something,
for example, whether input has been received
on a particular input port of a device. The
defined interval between such state checks is
often called a polling frequency.
Port
Logical endpoint for data traffic. Networks
use different ports for different types of data
traffic. Therefore it is sometimes, but not
always, necessary to specify which port to
use for particular data communication. Most
ports are used automatically based on the
types of data included in the communication.
On TCP/IP networks, port numbers range
from 0 to 65536, but only ports 0 to 1024 are
reserved for particular purposes. For example,
port 80 is used for HTTP traffic, which is used
when viewing web pages.
Glossary of Terms
Post-recording
The ability to store recordings from periods
following motion and/or specified events.
It is based on incoming video buffered on the
system server in case it is needed for a
motion- or event-triggered recording.
It can be a good idea to use post-recording if,
for example, you have defined that the
system should record video while a gate is
open and you would like to see what happens
immediately after the gate closes.
Pre-alarm
Pre-alarm images is a feature available for
selected cameras only. It enables the sending
of images from immediately before an event
took place from the camera to ÿour system
via email.
Pre-buffer
See the description of Pre-recording.
Pre-recording
The ability to store recordings from periods
before your system detected motion and/or
specified events. This ability is based on
incoming video buffered on the system server
in case it is needed for a motion- or
event-triggered recording.
It can be a good idea to use pre-recording if,
for example, you have defined that the
system should record video when someone
opens a door, it may also be important to be
able to see what happened right before the
doors opened.
Privacy masking
The ability to define if and how selected areas
of a camera's view should be masked before
distribution. For example, if a camera films
on a street, you can highlight certain areas of
a building (for example, windows and doors)
191
Network Video Management System Standard Edition 2016 R3 - Administrator Manual
S
with privacy masking in order to protect
residents' privacy.
SCS
PUK
Personal Unblocking Key or PIN Unlock
Key—number used as an extra security
measure for SIM cards.
R
Recording
On IP video surveillance systems, recording
means saving video and, if applicable,
audio from a camera in the camera
database on the surveillance system. In
many IP surveillance systems, all the
video/audio received from cameras is not
necessarily saved. Saving of video and audio
in a camera database is in many cases
started only when there is a reason to do so,
for example, when motion is detected, when
an event occurs, or when a specific period of
time begins. Recording is then stopped after
a specified amount of time, for example,
when motion is no longer detected, when an
event occurs, or when a time period ends.
The term recording originates from the
analog video era, when images were taped
only when the record button was pressed.
Recording Server service
Windows service (without any user interface)
used by your system for recording and
displaying video. Video is only transferred to
the surveillance system while the Recording
Server service is running.
Restore point
Restore points allow you to return to a
previous configuration state. When a
configuration change is applied in your
system, a restore point is created. If
something goes wrong in your configuration,
you can browse through restore points, and
return to a suitable one.
Glossary of Terms
A file extension (.scs) for a script type
targeted at controlling clients.
SIM
Subscriber identity module—circuit stored on
a small card inserted into a mobile phone or
computer, or other mobile device. The SIM
card is used to identify and authenticate the
user.
SMTP
Simple Mail Transfer Protocol—standard for
sending e-mail messages between mail
servers.
Software License Code (SLC)
Software license code (SLC) is a product
registration code required to use the
surveillance system software. Your software
licenses file is named after your Software
License Code (SLC). If you do not have
system administration responsibilities, you do
not have to work with SLCs. System
administrators use SLCs during the
installation and registration of the software.
Software license file
A file that contains all the permissions you
have for your system, including base licenses
and other licenses.
The filename is based on your Software
License Code (SLC).
Subnet
A part of a network. Dividing a network into
subnets can be advantageous for
management and security reasons, and may
in some cases also help improve performance.
On TCP/IP-based networks, a subnet is
basically a part of a network on which all
devices share the same prefix in their IP
addresses, for example 123.123.123.xxx,
where the first three numbers (123.123.123)
are the shared prefix. Network administrators
192
Network Video Management System Standard Edition 2016 R3 - Administrator Manual
use subnet masks to divide networks into
subnets.
include software for automatically saving
open files, for alerting system administrators,
etc.
T
TCP
Transmission Control Protocol—protocol (or
standard) used for sending data packets
across networks. TCP is often combined with
another protocol, IP (Internet Protocol). The
combination, known as TCP/IP, allows data
packets to be sent back and forth between
two points on a network for longer periods of
time, and is used when connecting computers
and other devices on the internet.
TCP/IP
Transmission Control Protocol/Internet
Protocol—combination of protocols (or
standards) used when connecting computers
and other devices on networks, including the
internet.
Telnet
Terminal emulation program used on TCP/IP
networks. With Telnet, you can connect to a
server from a computer on the network and
execute commands through Telnet as if you
were entering them directly on the server.
Windows includes a client for use with Telnet.
U
UDP
User Datagram Protocol—connectionless
protocol for sending data packets across
networks. Primarily used for broadcasting
messages. UDP is a fairly simple protocol,
with less error recovery features than, for
example, the TCP protocol.
UPS
A UPS (Uninterruptible Power Supply) works
as a battery-driven secondary power source,
providing the necessary power for saving
open files and safely powering down your
system in the event of power irregularities.
UPSs vary in sophistication, but many UPSs
Glossary of Terms
V
VCA
Video content analysis (VCA) is a system that
detects various types of previously specified
behavior, both of humans and vehicles. A
VCA-based system provides third-party video
content analysis, spanning from face
recognition, over advanced motion detection,
to complex behavioral analysis. VCA systems
and their output can seamlessly be integrated
with the Alarms feature and used for, for
example, triggering alarms. The events
resulting from VCA systems are called
analytics events.
Third-party VCA tools are developed by
independent partners delivering solutions
based on an a Sony open platform. These
solutions can impact performance on your
system.
Video encoder
A device, typically a standalone device, that
can stream video from a number of
connected client cameras. Video encoders
contain image digitizers, making it possible to
connect analog cameras to a network.
Video motion detection (VMD)
Video motion detection. A way of defining
activity in a scene by analyzing image data
and the differences in a series of images.
Video server
Another name for a video encoder.
View
A collection of video from one or more
cameras, presented together in Network
Video Management System Smart Client. A
view may include other content, such as
HTML pages and static images, in addition to
video from cameras.
193
Network Video Management System Standard Edition 2016 R3 - Administrator Manual
W
Wizard
A utility to help perform a particular task
quickly, while also ensuring coverage of all
relevant parameters. For example, the
Adjust Motion Detection wizard quickly
helps you configure motion detection on each
of the system's cameras without the risk of
forgetting to set any key parameters.
Glossary of Terms
194
Network Video Management System Standard Edition 2016 R3 - Administrator Manual
Index
About licenses • 21
About logs • 126
A
About maps • 166, 167
About and master/slave servers • 149
About master and slave • 32, 138
About accessing logs and exports • 159, 160
About microphones • 54, 97
About actions • 152
About minimum system requirements • 10
About alarms • 165, 167
About Mobile Server Manager • 159
About archiving • 44, 46, 47, 48, 49, 61, 68,
About motion detection • 62, 66, 90
69, 71, 80, 116, 124, 177
About archiving audio • 118
About archiving locations • 117
About archiving schedules • 119
About automatic device discovery • 173, 175
About backup and restore of configuration •
179
About database resizing • 61
About daylight saving time • 11
About dedicated input/output devices • 55,
107
About device changes without activation • 23,
25, 37
About dynamic archive paths • 118
About email • 130
About events and output • 99
About hardware devices • 54
About important port numbers • 10
About importing changes to configuration •
185, 186
About input and output • 99
About license activation • 23, 25, 31
Index
About motion detection and PTZ cameras •
63, 66
About naming an output for use in NVMS
Mobile • 152
About naming of host names • 10
About Network Video Management System
Smart Client • 14
About Network Video Management System
Web Client • 17
About notifications • 103, 130
About NVMS Mobile • 148
About NVMS Mobile client • 15
About NVMS Mobile server • 149
About protecting recording databases from
corruption • 33
About recording audio • 54
About registered services • 135
About removing system components • 30
About replacing hardware devices • 24, 56
About required fields for CSV files when you
import changes to configurations • 185
About restarting services • 35
195
Network Video Management System Standard Edition 2016 R3 - Administrator Manual
About saving changes to the configuration •
34
Add a hardware output • 89, 99, 101, 102,
104, 110
About scheduling • 116
Add a manual event • 101, 103, 111, 169
About scheduling of notifications • 134
Add a time profile (for alarms) • 166, 167,
About server access • 135
About services • 62, 145
About show status • 159, 160, 164
About SMS • 132
About speakers • 54
About the Getting started page • 37
About the Replace Hardware Device wizard •
25, 56, 57, 60
169, 172
Add a timer event • 101, 102, 103, 104, 110,
111, 112, 116
Add an alarm • 167, 169
Add an analytics event • 101
Add an automatic export rule • 152
Add basic users • 32, 139, 141, 142, 143
Add hardware
About the tray icons • 146, 148
Import from CSV file - CSV file format and
requirements • 42
About time servers • 11, 175
Scanning options • 39
About updates • 30
Select hardware manufacturers to scan for
• 39
About users • 139
About using the help • 34
About using Video Push to stream video •
150
About video and recording configuration • 31,
58, 61, 64, 67, 69, 70, 75, 78, 79, 80, 81,
82, 85, 86, 87, 89, 90, 98, 125
About viewing archived recordings • 121
About virus scanning • 12, 121
Access Network Video Management System
Web Client • 17, 159
Activate licenses offline • 25
Add a generic event • 101, 103
Add a hardware input event • 101, 102, 109
Add Hardware Devices wizard - Import from
CSV File - example of CSV file • 41
Add hardware wizard • 38, 54
Add or edit a Mobile server • 149
Add user groups • 32, 52, 140, 141, 142,
143
Add Windows users • 139, 140, 141, 142,
143
Adjust motion detection
Exclude regions • 50, 66
Motion detection • 50
Adjust motion detection wizard • 49
Administrator • 187
Advanced configuration • 37, 54
Alarm data settings • 170
Index
196
Network Video Management System Standard Edition 2016 R3 - Administrator Manual
Alarms • 165
Alarms definition • 105, 167, 169, 170, 171
Alarms properties • 169
Analytics Events • 187
Analytics Events (properties) • 177
Archiving • 119, 121, 124
Aspect ratio • 187
ATM • 187
Attachment Settings (email) • 131
Audio (properties) • 85
Audio recording • 79
Audio Recording • 177
Audio selection (properties) • 80
Automatic configuration wizard • 31, 37
Continue after scan • 38
First page • 37
Scanning for hardware devices • 38
Scanning options • 37
Select hardware manufacturers to scan for
• 37
Automatic response if running out of disk
space • 119
AVI • 187
B
Back up and restore alarm and map
configuration • 180
C
Camera access • 123, 141, 143
Camera and database action • 57
Camera properties • 81
Cameras and storage information • 61
Camera-specific scheduling properties • 124
Carousel • 187
Change default file paths • 173
Clients • 14
Codec • 187
Configure camera-specific schedules • 32, 63,
65, 122, 124, 125
Configure email notifications • 110, 111, 115,
130
Configure general event handling • 101, 105,
106, 112
Configure general scheduling and archiving •
32, 65, 121, 123
Configure hardware devices • 55, 59, 60
Configure hardware output on event • 99,
101, 103, 104, 116
Configure master and slave servers • 32, 138
Configure microphones or speakers • 98
Configure motion detection • 66
Configure server access • 32, 52, 136
Back up system configuration • 179
Configure SMS notifications • 133
Backing up and restoring configuration • 179
Configure storage
Base license • 187
Drive selection • 46
Before you start • 10
Live and recording settings - H.264/MPEG4
cameras • 45
Best practices • 33
Live and recording settings (motion JPEG
cameras) • 44
Index
197
Network Video Management System Standard Edition 2016 R3 - Administrator Manual
Online schedule • 43
Recording and archiving settings • 48
Video settings and preview • 42
Configure storage wizard • 42, 118, 119
Configure system, event and audit logging •
128
Configure the system in the Management
Application • 27, 31, 181
Email (Properties) • 124, 130
Event notification • 89
Event Server • 188
Event Server Settings • 178
Events and output • 99
Events and output properties • 107
Export and import Management Application
configuration • 179, 183
Configure user and group rights • 32, 52, 53,
89, 93, 103, 140, 141
Express • 38, 39
Configure when cameras should do what • 65
F
Connecting Hardware Devices • 12, 175
Fill in/edit surveillance server credentials •
159, 161
Connectivity • 154
Copyright, trademarks and disclaimer • 9
CSV • 187
First time use • 31
Fisheye • 188
D
Fisheye lens (properties) • 92
Default File Paths • 117, 176, 179
FPS • 188
Delete/disable hardware devices • 25, 56, 66
Frame rate • 188
Device • 187
Frame rate - MJPEG • 75, 125
Device changes without activation • 187
Frame Rate - MPEG • 78
DirectX • 188
Frequently asked questions (FAQs) • 162
Disable or delete cameras • 21, 66
G
DNS • 188
Driver • 188
DST • 188
Dual stream • 188
Dynamic path selection (properties) • 61, 69,
88, 177
General • 45, 81, 86, 90, 153, 174
General access • 141, 142, 144
General event properties • 107
General scheduling properties • 121
Generate alarms based on analytics events •
105
E
Generic event • 103, 112
Edit certificate • 154, 159, 160
Generic events • 188
Email • 130
Get additional licenses • 25
Index
198
Network Video Management System Standard Edition 2016 R3 - Administrator Manual
Getting started • 37
Importing changes to configuration • 185
GOP • 188
Information, driver selection and verification
• 40
Grace period • 188
Group information • 142
GUID • 189
H
H.264 • 189
Hardware detection and verification • 40
Hardware device • 189
Hardware device license • 189
Hardware device summary • 22, 24
Hardware devices • 54
Install and upgrade • 27
Install Network Video Management System
Smart Client • 27
Install video device drivers • 29
Install your system software • 27, 31, 167
Investigations • 155
IPIX • 189
J
JPEG • 190
K
Hardware input event • 102, 103, 109
Keyframe • 190
Hardware name and video channels • 59
L
Hardware output • 110
Language support and XML encoding • 137
Hardware properties • 59
License information overview • 21, 22
Host • 189
Licenses • 21, 37
Hotspot • 189
Local IP ranges • 137
How the number of device changes without
Log properties • 128
activation is calculated • 23
I
I/O • 189
Log Settings • 157
Logs • 126
M
If the camera uses the MJPEG video format •
72
If the camera uses the MPEG video format •
74
I-frame • 189
Image Server • 189
Import changes to configuration • 185, 186
Import from CSV file • 39, 40, 41
Index
MAC address • 190
Manage user access
Access summary • 53
Basic and Windows users • 52
Manage user access wizard • 32, 52, 141
Manual • 39, 40
Manual event • 111
Manual events • 190
199
Network Video Management System Standard Edition 2016 R3 - Administrator Manual
Manual recording • 75, 86, 144
NVMS Mobile • 148
Master/Slave • 138, 190
NVMS Mobile client • 15
Master/slave properties • 138
NVMS Mobile configuration • 149, 162
Message Settings (email) • 130, 134
NVMS Mobile introduction • 148
Message Settings (SMS) • 133, 134
O
Microphone (properties) • 98
Microphones • 97
MJPEG • 190
Mobile Server Manager • 159
Mobile server settings • 153
Monitor • 190
Online period • 45, 66, 82, 86, 103, 123, 124
Options • 173
Output • 89, 103
Output control on event (Events and
Output-specific properties) • 104, 116
Overview of events and output • 32, 71, 79,
86, 97, 100, 102, 103, 104, 169
Monitor storage space usage • 35
P
Motion detection & exclude regions • 45, 66,
Panomorph • 190
77, 79, 86, 90, 102
Move PTZ type 1 and 3 to required positions
• 66
MPEG • 190
N
Network Video Management System
Download Manager • 19, 32
Network Video Management System Smart
Client • 14
Network Video Management System Web
Client • 17
Network, device type, and license • 56, 59
New hardware device information • 57
Notification Scheduling properties • 131, 133,
135
Notifications • 130
NTLM • 190
Pan-tilt-zoom (PTZ) • 190
Performance • 156
P-frame • 191
PIN • 191
Ping • 191
Polling • 191
Port • 191
Ports and polling • 55, 105, 107
POS • 191
Post-recording • 191
Pre-alarm • 191
Pre-buffer • 191
Pre-recording • 191
Prerequisites for using NVMS Mobile • 148
Privacy masking • 92, 191
PTZ device (properties) • 56, 60
Index
200
Network Video Management System Standard Edition 2016 R3 - Administrator Manual
PTZ on event • 97, 103
Servers • 148
PTZ patrolling • 123, 125
Services • 145
PTZ patrolling (properties) • 63, 94, 125
Set up investigations • 149
PTZ preset positions • 93, 97
Set up Video Push to stream video • 150, 155
PUK • 192
Settings • 174
R
Show or hide microphones or speakers • 55,
Recording • 70, 75, 76, 78, 85, 109, 145,
192
Recording and archiving paths • 87, 176
Recording and archiving paths (properties) •
67
Recording and storage properties • 67
Recording Server Manager • 18
Recording Server service • 192
Regular frame rate properties • 76
Restore point • 192
Restore system configuration • 179
Restore system configuration from a restore
point • 34, 184
98
Show/edit port numbers • 159, 162
SIM • 192
SMS • 132
SMS properties • 133
SMTP • 192
Software and system components • 13
Software License Code (SLC) • 192
Software license file • 192
Sound settings • 170, 172
Speaker properties • 58, 98
Speedup • 73, 77, 79, 125
S
Speedup frame rate properties • 77
Scheduling • 134
Start and stop services • 36, 49, 50, 56, 90,
Scheduling all cameras • 121
Scheduling and archiving • 116
Scheduling options • 43, 121, 123, 125
SCS • 192
Server access • 11, 135, 136
Server access properties • 136
Server Settings (email) • 132
Server Settings (SMS) • 134
Server Status • 154
Index
93, 94, 97, 145, 147
Start, stop and restart Mobile service • 159,
162
Start, stop, or restart the Event Server
service • 147
Storage capacity required for archiving • 119
Storage information • 81
Subnet • 192
System maintenance • 179
System overview • 13
201
Network Video Management System Standard Edition 2016 R3 - Administrator Manual
View video from cameras in Management
T
Application • 35, 36, 49, 50, 90, 93, 94, 97
TCP • 193
TCP/IP • 193
Telnet • 193
W
Wizard • 194
Template and common properties • 76
Test a generic event • 105, 112
Test an analytics event • 107
Test Analytics Event (properties) • 107, 108
Time profile • 172
Timer event • 104, 112
U
UDP • 193
Upgrade • 30
Upgrading from one product version to
another product version • 30, 31
UPS • 33, 193
User information • 141
User Interface • 174
User properties • 141
Users • 139
V
VCA • 193
Video • 78, 82, 125
Video encoder • 193
Video motion detection (VMD) • 193
Video Push • 155
Video recording (properties) • 70
Video server • 193
View • 193
Index
202